Toshiba Personal Computer Satellite U200 Maintenance Manual 559m_fr

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-Personal-Computer-Satellite-U200-Maintenance-Manual-130929 toshiba-personal-computer-satellite-u200-maintenance-manual-130929 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 374

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Toshiba Personal Computer
PORTÉGÉ M500
Satellite U200
Maintenance Manual

TOSHIBA CORPORATION
File Number 960-559

[CONFIDENTIAL]

Copyright
© 2006 by Toshiba Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual
cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of Toshiba. No patent
liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Toshiba Personal Computer PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual
First edition April 2006
Disclaimer
The information presented in this manual has been reviewed and validated for accuracy. The
included set of instructions and descriptions are accurate for the PORTÉGÉ M500 at the time
of this manual's production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to
change without notice. Therefore, Toshiba assumes no liability for damages incurred
directly or indirectly from errors, omissions, or discrepancies between any succeeding
product and this manual.
Trademarks
IBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.
Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel Core, Celeron and Centrino are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries/regions.
Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak.
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA under license.
i.LINK is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Preface
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the
Toshiba Personal Computer PORTÉGÉ M500.
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate
faulty Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.
DANGER: “Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
WARNING: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily
injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
CAUTION: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.
NOTE: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance
service.
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service
technicians and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety
precautions are adhered to strictly.
Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. If a screw is not fully
fastened, it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit, which could cause
overheating, smoke or fire.
If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model
battery or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong
battery can cause the battery to explode.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

iii

The manual is divided into the following parts:
Chapter 1

Hardware Overview describes the PORTÉGÉ M500 system unit and
each FRU.

Chapter 2

Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve
FRU problems.

Chapter 3

Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic
operations for maintenance service.

Chapter 4

Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the
FRUs.

Appendices

The appendices describe the following:

Handling the LCD module
Board layout
Pin assignments
Keyboard scan/character codes
Key layout
Wiring diagrams
BIOS rewrite procedures
EC/KBC rewrite procedures
Reliability

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and
operating procedures.
Acronyms
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in
parentheses following their definition. For example:
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Keys
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on
the keyboard is printed in boldface type.
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such
operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause
(Break) means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If
three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.
User input
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:
DISKCOPY A: B:
The display
Text generated by the computer that appears on its display is presented in the type face
below:
Format complete
System transferred

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

Table of Contents
Chapter 1

Hardware Overview

1.1

Features ...................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2

2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive......................................................................................... 1-12

1.3

Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 1-14

1.4

Optical Drive............................................................................................................ 1-15

1.5

TFT Color Display................................................................................................... 1-17

1.6

Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 1-19

1.7

Batteries ................................................................................................................... 1-21

1.8

AC Adaptor.............................................................................................................. 1-23

Chapter 2

Troubleshooting Procedures

2.1

Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2

Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................ 2-3

2.3

Power Supply Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 2-7

2.4

System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................ 2-19

2.5

USB FDD Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 2-36

2.6

HDD Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 2-39

2.7

Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting.............................................................. 2-44

2.8

Display Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-47

2.9

Optical Drive Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 2-49

2.10

Modem Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-51

2.11

LAN Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-53

2.12

Bluetooth Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-54

2.13

Wireless LAN Troubleshooting............................................................................... 2-56

2.14

Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................ 2-58

2.15

Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 2-61

2.16

Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting......................................................................... 2-62

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Chapter 3

Tests and Diagnostics

3.1

The Diagnostic Test ................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2

Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4

3.3

Setting of the hardware configuration ....................................................................... 3-9

3.4

Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11

3.5

Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12

3.6

System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14

3.7

Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16

3.8

Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17

3.9

Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18

3.10

Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21

3.11

Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23

3.12

Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25

3.13

Hard Disk Test ......................................................................................................... 3-26

3.14

Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29

3.15

NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31

3.16

Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32

3.17

CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34

3.18

Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-35

3.19

Hard Disk Test Detail Status ................................................................................... 3-38

3.20

ONLY ONE TEST................................................................................................... 3-40

3.21

Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-47

3.22

Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-48

3.23

Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-50

3.24

Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-51

3.25

System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-56

3.26

Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros) ................................................................... 3-58

3.27

Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)...................................................... 3-65

3.28

LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-69

3.29

Sound Test program................................................................................................. 3-84

3.30

SETUP ..................................................................................................................... 3-90

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

vii

Chapter 4

Replacement Procedures

4.1

General....................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2

Battery pack ............................................................................................................... 4-8

4.3

PC card..................................................................................................................... 4-10

4.4

Bridge media............................................................................................................ 4-11

4.5

HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.6

Optical drive............................................................................................................. 4-15

4.7

Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-18

4.8

Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-21

4.9

Cover FAT assembly ............................................................................................... 4-23

4.10

Fingerprint sensor board .......................................................................................... 4-28

4.11

Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-30

4.12

SW membrane.......................................................................................................... 4-32

4.13

Bluetooth module..................................................................................................... 4-34

4.14

Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-36

4.15

MDC (Modem Daughter Card)................................................................................ 4-38

4.16

Internal microphone ................................................................................................. 4-40

4.17

RTC battery ............................................................................................................. 4-42

4.18

Harness holder/LAN cable....................................................................................... 4-44

4.19

System board/DC-IN jack........................................................................................ 4-47

4.20

Modem jack/Wireless communication SW.............................................................. 4-50

4.21

Fan/CPU................................................................................................................... 4-53

4.22

HDD cable/PC card slot........................................................................................... 4-57

4.23

LCD unit/FL inverter ............................................................................................... 4-59

4.24

Speaker/LCD cable .................................................................................................. 4-65

4.25

Cover latch ............................................................................................................... 4-67

4.26

Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna............................................................... 4-68

4.27

Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-70

4.28

Battery slider............................................................................................................ 4-72

4.29

Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-73

viii

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendices
Appendix A

Handling the LCD Module ........................................................................... A-1

Appendix B

Board Layout ................................................................................................ B-1

Appendix C

Pin Assignments............................................................................................ C-1

Appendix D

Keyboard Scan/Character Codes .................................................................. D-1

Appendix E

Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1

Appendix F

Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................ F-1

Appendix G

BIOS rewrite Procedures .............................................................................. G-1

Appendix H

EC/KBC rewrite Procedures ......................................................................... H-1

Appendix I

Reliability........................................................................................................I-1

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Chapter 1
Hardware Overview

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Hardware Overview

1-ii

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1 Hardware Overview

Chapter 1

Contents

1.1

Features.......................................................................................................................1-1

1.2

2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................................1-12

1.3

Keyboard ..................................................................................................................1-14

1.4

Optical Drive ............................................................................................................1-15

1.5

1.4.1

DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive .........................................................1-15

1.4.2

DVD-Super Multi Drive .....................................................................1-16

TFT Color Display ...................................................................................................1-17
1.5.1

LCD Module .......................................................................................1-17

1.5.2

FL Inverter Board ...............................................................................1-18

1.6

Power Supply............................................................................................................1-19

1.7

Batteries....................................................................................................................1-21

1.8

1.7.1

Main Battery .......................................................................................1-21

1.7.2

RTC battery.........................................................................................1-22

AC Adaptor ..............................................................................................................1-23

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-iii

1 Hardware Overview

Figures
Figure 1-1

Front of the computer .....................................................................................1-5

Figure 1-2

System unit configuration...............................................................................1-5

Figure 1-3

System unit block diagram .............................................................................1-6

Figure 1-4

2.5-inch HDD ...............................................................................................1-12

Figure 1-5

Keyboard ......................................................................................................1-14

Figure 1-6

LCD module .................................................................................................1-17

Tables
Table 1-1

2.5-inch HDD specifications ........................................................................1-12

Table 1-2

DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive specifications...............................................1-15

Table 1-3

DVD Super Multi drive specifications .........................................................1-16

Table 1-4

LCD module specifications ..........................................................................1-17

Table 1-5

FL inverter board specifications...................................................................1-18

Table 1-6

Power supply output rating...........................................................................1-20

Table 1-7

Battery specifications ...................................................................................1-21

Table 1-8

Time required for charges ............................................................................1-21

Table 1-9

Data preservation time..................................................................................1-22

Table 1-10

RTC battery charging/data preservation time...............................................1-22

Table 1-11

AC adapter specifications.............................................................................1-23

1-iv

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.1 Features
1

1 Hardware Overview

Features

1.1

Features

The Toshiba PORTÉGÉ M500 Personal Computer uses advanced Large Scale Integration
(LSI), and Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology extensively to
provide compact size, minimum weight, low power usage and high reliability. This computer
incorporates the following features.
There some models and options according to BTO system. Refer to the Parts List for the
configuration of each model and options.
Microprocessor
The PORTÉGÉ M500 computer is equipped with one of the following processors.
Intel® CoreTM Duo
CoreTM Duo

1.66GHz (Processor Number : T2300)
1.83GHz (Processor Number : T2400)
2.00GHz (Processor Number : T2500)
2.16GHz (Processor Number : T2600)
2.33GHz (Processor Number : T2700)

Intel® CoreTM Solo
CoreTM Solo

1.66GHz (Processor Number : T1300)
1.83GHz (Processor Number : T1400)

Intel® Celeron® M
Celeron® M

1.46GHz (Processor Number : 410)
1.60GHz (Processor Number : 420)
1.73GHz (Processor Number : 430)

Chipset
Equipped with Intel 945GM/940GML as North Bridge, Intel ICH7-M as South Bridge
and Texas Instrument PCI7412 as Card Controller.
VGA Controller
An internal Graphics Controller in North Bridge is used.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-1

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

Memory
Two DDR2-533/DDR2-667 SDRAM slots. Memory modules can be installed to provide
a maximum of 4GB (Intel 945GM) or 2GB (Intel 940GML). Memory modules are
available in 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB and 2048MB sizes.
HDD
The computer has a 2.5-inch SATA HDD. The following capacities are available.
•

40/60/80/100/120 GB

USB FDD
A 3.5-inch USB FDD accommodates 2HD (1.44MB) or 2DD (720KB) disks.
Optical Drive
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive (double layer) can be installed.
Display
LCD : Built-in 12.1 inch, 16M colors, WXGA (1280×800dots), thin type low
temperature poly-silicon TFT color display.
External monitor : Supported via an RGB connector.
Keyboard
An-easy-to-use 84(US)/85(UK)-key keyboard provides a numeric keypad overlay for fast
numeric data entry or for cursor and page control. The keyboard also includes two keys
that have special functions in Microsoft® Windows® 2000/XP. It supports software that
uses a 101- or 102-key enhanced keyboard.
Touch pad
A Touch Pad and control buttons in the palm rest enable control of the on-screen pointer
and scrolling of windows.
Batteries
The computer has two batteries: a rechargeable Lithium-Ion main battery pack and RTC
battery (that backs up the Real Time Clock and CMOS memory).

1-2

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)
Three USB ports are provided. The ports comply with the USB2.0 standard.
IEEE 1394 port
The computer comes with one IEEE 1394 port. It enables high-speed data transfer
directly from external devices such as digital video cameras.
External monitor (RGB) port
The port enables connection of an external monitor, which is recognized automatically by
Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) Display Data Channel (DDC) 2B
compatible functions.
PC card slot
A PC card slot is provided. The PC card slot (PCMCIA) accommodates one Type II card.
Bridge media slot
This supports one SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick PRO/xD
picture card/MultiMediaCard slot. Data can be read and written by inserting each media
to the slot.
Fingerprint sensor
The computer is equipped with a fingerprint sensor and fingerprint authentication utility.
They enable only person who has registered his/her fingerprint to use the computer.
Sound system
The sound system is equipped with the following features:
•

Stereo speakers

•

Built-in microphone

•

Volume control

•

Stereo headphone jack

•

External microphone jack

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-3

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

Internal modem
The computer contains a MDC, enabling data and fax communication. It supports ITU-T
V.90 (V.92). The transfer rates are 56 Kbps for data reception, 33.6 Kbps for data
transmission, and 14,400 bps for fax transmission. However, the actual speed depends on
the line quality. The RJ11 modem jack is used to accommodate a telephone line. Both of
V.90 and V.92 are supported only in USA, Canada and Australia. Only V.90 is available
in other regions.
Internal LAN
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASET), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet
LAN (1000 megabits per second, 1000BASE-T). It also supports Wakeup on LAN
(WOL), Magic Packet and LED. Some models are not equipped with a Gigabit Ethernet
LAN.
Wireless LAN
The computer is equipped with PCI Express Mini Card type wireless LAN card that
supports 802.11 b/g or 802.11 a/b/g in the PCI Express MiniCard slot. This function can
be switched on and off by a switch on the computer.
Bluetooth
The computer is equipped with Bluetooth (V2.0+EDR) communications standard enable
wireless connection between electronic devices such as computers and printers. It
supports wireless communication switch.
Presentation button
This button switches the display between internal display, external display, simultaneous
display and multi-monitor display.
TOSHIBA Assist button
When this button is pressed during power-on, the PC is connected to “Toshiba Assist”.
When this button is pressed during power-off, the PC is turned on and connected to
“Toshiba Assist”.

1-4

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

The front of the computer is shown in figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Front of the computer
The system unit configuration is shown in figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 System unit configuration

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-5

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

System Unit Block Diagram
Figure 1-3 is a block diagram of the system unit.

Figure 1-3 System unit block diagram

1-6

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

The system unit is composed of the following major components:
Processor
Intel® CoreTM Duo Processor (dual core) or Intel® CoreTM Solo Processor (single
core)
•

Core speed:
Dual core:

1.66GHz (T2300) /1.83GHz (T2400)/2.00GHz (T2500)/
2.16GHz (T2600)/2.33GHz (T2700)

Single core

1.66GHz (T1300)/1.83GHz (T1400)
(

): Processor Number

– Processor bus speed: 667MHz
– Core voltage: 0.50 to 1.30V
– Integrated L1 cache memory of 64KB (32KB +32KB)
– Integrated L2 cache memory of 2MB
– Integrated NDP
– 478-pin Micro FC-PGA package
Intel® Celeron® M Processor
•

Core speed:
1.46GHz (410)/1.60GHz (420)/1.72GHz (430)
(

): Processor Number

– Processor bus speed: 533MHz
– Core voltage: 1.00 to 1.30V
– Integrated L1 cache memory of 64KB (32KB +32KB)
– Integrated L2 cache memory of 1MB
– Integrated NDP
– 478-pin Micro FC-PGA package

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-7

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

Memory
Two memory slots capable of accepting DDR2-SDRAM 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB or
2048MB memory modules for a maximum of 4GB (Intel 945GM) or 2GB (Intel
940GML).
•

200-pin Small Outline DIMM

•

1.8V operation

•

PC2-4200(DDR2-533)/PC2-5300(DDR2-667) support

Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
•

One STMicro M25PE80-VMW6TG is used.

•

8Mbits of flash memory are used.
– 320KB for System BIOS
– 64KB for VGA BIOS
– 64KB for Finger Print PBA
– 128KB for LAN BIOS
– 24KB for Boot
– 16KB for Parameter Block
– 32KB for Option Log
– Others

North Bridge
•

One Intel 945GM/940GML is used.

•

Features:
– Supports Yonah Processor System Bus
– Supports System Memory : DDR2-400/DDR2-533/DDR2-667,
4GB (Intel 945GM) (max) or 2GB (Intel 940GML) (max)
– Internal Graphics Controller : Inter Generation 3.5 Integrated GFX Core
(250MHz)
– DMI(Direct Media Interface)
– Supports ICH.
– 1466-ball 37.5×37.5×2.56mm FC-BGA package

1-8

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

South Bridge (Intel ICH7-M)
•

Features:
– DMI(Direct Media Interface)
– PCI Express I/F (4 ports)
– PCI Bus I/F Rev2.3 (6 PCI REQ/GNT Pairs)
– Integrated Serial ATA Host Controller (2 Prots,150MB/S)
– Integrated IDE Controller (Ultra ATA 100/66/33)
– AC’97 2.3 codecs
– Intel High Definition controller (Azalia)
– USB 1.1/2.0 Controller 8 ports
– Built-in LAN controller (WfM 2.0 & IEEE 802.3 compliance)
– Power Management (ACPI 2.0 compliance)
– SMBus2.0 controller
– Low Pin Count (LPC) interface (EC/KBC, Super I/O)
– IRQ controller
– Serial Interrupt Function
– Suspend/Resume control
– Built –in RTC
– GPIO
– 652-ball 31×31×2.51mm BGA Package

PC Card Controller (TI PCI7412)
− PCI I/F
− CardBus / Ultra media Controller (1 socket)
− SD/MMC, Memory Stick, XD Card Controller
− 1394 Controller (2 ports)
– 288-ball, 16×16×1.4mm, BGA Package

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-9

1 Hardware Overview

1.1 Features

GPU
Graphics interface in North Bridge (Intel 945GM/940GML) is used.
− PCI Express Interface
− LCD Interface LVDS 2ch, Supports UXGA (1600×1200)
− Analog CRT : 400MHz RAMDAC, QXGA (2048×1536) monitor
− Does not support DVI
Sound Controller
•

Azalia Link (Intel High Definition Audio I/F) built in the South Bridge (ICH7-M) +
ADI AD1981HD
− Stereo speakers
− Built-in microphone
− Volume control
− Stereo headphone jack
− External microphone jack

Modem Controller
•

Askey/FOXCONN-made one MDC is used.

•

This controller has the following functions:
– One RJ11 port
– V.92 (V.90) 56K Modem/FAX
– Supports Ring Wakeup

1-10

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.1 Features

1 Hardware Overview

Internal LAN Controller
•

Intel made Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN
(100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX) or Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits
per second, 1000BASE-T) is used. Some models are not equipped with a Gigabit
Ethernet LAN.

•

This controller has the following functions:
– PCI-Ex connection
– Supports Gigabit Ethernet
– Supports Fast Ethernet
– One RJ45 port
– Supports WOL
– Supports Magic Packet
– Supports LED
– Makes LAN to “Disable” in BIOS

Wireless LAN
•

One Mini PCI Express Card slot
− Supports 802.11b/g or 802.11a/b/g
− Supports Communication SW
− Supports W-LAN via PCMCIA (Euro : GSM/GPRS)
− Does not support WOL

Other main system chips
•
•
•
•
•
•

Clock Generator (ICS-made 954321AGLFT)
EC/KBC (Renesas-made M306KAFCLRP U0)
PSC (Toshiba-made TMP86FS49UG)
Temperature sensor (ADM-made 1032ARMZ ×2)
Acceleration sensor (ST Micro-made LIS3L02AQ3)
TPM (Infineon-made SLB9635 TT 1.2)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-11

1 Hardware Overview

1.2

1.2 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive

2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive

The removable HDD is a random access non-volatile storage device. It has a non-removable
2.5-inch magnetic disk and mini-Winchester type magnetic heads.
The computer supports a 40GB, 60GB, 80GB, 100GB or 120GB.
The HDD is shown in figure 1-4. Specifications are listed in Table 1-1.

Figure 1-4 2.5-inch HDD
Table 1-1 2.5-inch HDD specifications (1/2)
Specifications
Items
Outline
dimensions

TOSHIBA

HDD2D34BZK01

HDD2D35BZK01

HDD2D32BZK01

HDD2D30BZK01

Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)

Storage size (formatted)

69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
100±0.41
98 max.
40GB

102 max.
60GB

Speed (RPM)

100GB

218-429

236.1-456.0

5,400

Data transfer rate (Mb/s)

218-429

Data buffer size (KB)

244.7-474.7
8,192

Average seek time (ms)
Read
Motor startup time (s)

1-12

80GB

[CONFIDENTIAL]

16,384
12

4 typ.

3.5 typ.

4 typ.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.2 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive

1 Hardware Overview

Table 1-1 2.5-inch HDD specifications (2/2)
Specifications
Items
Outline
dimensions

Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)

Storage size (formatted)

HITACHI GST

G8BC00029411

G8BC00029611

G8BC00029811

G8BC00029A11

69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
100.2±0.25
102 max.

95 max.
40GB

60GB

Speed (RPM)

80GB

100GB

5,400

Data transfer rate
To/From media
To/From host

493 Mb/s max.
1.5Gbps

Data buffer size (MB)

Average seek time (ms)
Read

Motor startup time (s)

3.5 typ.

Specifications
Items
Outline
dimensions

Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)

Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
Data transfer rate
To/From media (Mb/s)
To/From host (Gbps)
Data buffer size (KB)

TOSHIBA
HDD2D31BZK01

HITACHI GST
G8BC0002NA10

69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
100±0.41
102 max.

69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
100.2±0.25
115 max.

120GB

100GB

5,400

7,200

244.7-474.7
-

629 max.
1.5

8,192

10 typ.

3.5 typ.

4 typ.

Average seek time (ms)
Read
Motor startup time (s)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-13

1 Hardware Overview

1.3

1.3 Keyboard

Keyboard

The keyboard is mounted 84(US)/85(UK) keys that consist of character key and control key.
The keyboard is connected to membrane connector on the system board and controlled by the
keyboard controller.
Figure 1-5 is a view of the keyboard.
See Appendix E about a layout of the keyboard.

Figure 1-5 Keyboard

1-14

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.4 Optical Drive

1.4

1 Hardware Overview

Optical Drive

1.4.1 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive
The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15inch) CD-ROM, DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW.
The specifications of the DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive are described in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications
Specifications

Item

MATSUSHITA G8CC00025A20
Outline
dimensions

Width (mm)

128 (excluding projections)

Height (mm)

9.5 (excluding projections)

Depth (mm)

129 (excluding projections)

Mass (g)

141±3

Data transfer speed (Read)
DVD-ROM
CD-ROM

Max. 8x CAV
Max. 24x CAV

Data transfer speed (Write)
CD-R
CD-RW
High Speed CD-RW
Ultra Speed CD-RW

Max. 24x CAV
Max. 4x CLV
Max. 10x CLV
Max. 24x CAV

ATAPI Burst (MB/s)
PIO Mode
DMA Mode
Ultra DMA Mode

16.6 (PIO MODE4)
16.6 (Multi Word Mode2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)

Data Buffer Capacity

2MB

Access time (ms)
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM

150 typ. (Random)
170 typ. (Random)

Supported Disks

CD: CD/CD-ROM (12cm, 8cm), CD-R,
CD-RW
DVD:DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM,
DVD-R DL, DVD+RW, DVD+RAM,
DVD+R DL

Supported Formats

CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA,
PHOTO CD, CD-Extra(CD+), CD-text
DVD:DVD-R, DVD-RW (Ver.1.2),
DVD-Video, DVD+R, DVD+RW,
DVD-RAM (2.6GB/4.7GB)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-15

1 Hardware Overview

1.4 Optical Drive

1.4.2 DVD-Super Multi Drive
The DVD Super Multi drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch)
CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVDRAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL.
The specifications are listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 DVD Super Multi drive specifications
Item

Specifications
MATSUSHITA G8CC00030120

Outline
dimensions

Width (mm)

128 (excluding projections)

Height (mm)

9.5 (excluding projections)

Depth (mm)

129 (excluding projections)

Mass (g)
Data transfer speed (Read)
DVD-ROM
CD-ROM
Data transfer speed (Write)
CD-R
CD-RW
High Speed CD-RW
Ultra Speed CD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DVD-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R DL
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM

Max. 8x CAV
Max. 24x CAV
Max. 24x ZCLV
Max. 4x CLV
Max. 10x CLV
Max. 16x CLV
Max. 8x ZCLV
Max. 2x CLV
Max. 4x ZCLV
Max. 8x ZCLV
Max. 2.4x CLV
Max. 4x ZCLV
Max. 2-3x ZCLV (4.7GB)

ATAPI Burst (MB/s)
PIO Mode
DMA Mode
Ultra DMA Mode

16.6 (PIO MODE4)
16.6 (Multi Word Mode2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)

Data Buffer Capacity

2MB

Access time (ms)
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM

1-16

140±5

150Msec typ.
180msec typ.

Supported Disks

CD: CD/CD-ROM (12cm, 8cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL,
DVD+RW, DVD+RAM, DVD+R DL

Supported Formats

CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA, Photo CD (multiSession), Video CD, CD-Extra (CD+), CD-text
DVD:DVD-VIDEO, DVD-ROM, DVD-R (3.9GB, 4.7GB),
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2), DVD-RAM,
DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD+RW

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.5 TFT Color Display

1.5

1 Hardware Overview

TFT Color Display

The TFT color display consists of 12.1-inch WXGA LCD module and FL inverter board.
1.5.1

LCD Module

The LCD module used for the TFT color display uses a backlight as the light source and can
display a maximum of 16M colors with 1,200 x 800 resolution. The GPU in North Bridge
can control internal and external WXGA support displays simultaneously.
Figure 1-6 shows a view of the LCD module and Table 1-4 lists the specifications.

Figure 1-6 LCD module
Table 1-4 LCD module specifications
Specifications

Item

12.1-inch WXGA TFT (TMD G33C0003C110)
Number of Dots

1,280(W) x 800(H)

Dot spacing (mm)

0.204(H) x 0.204(V)

Display range (mm)

275.8(H) x 178.0(V)

Specifications

Item

12.1-inch WXGA TFT (SAMSUNG G33C0003K110)
Number of Dots

1,280(W) x 800(H)

Dot spacing (mm)

0.204(H) x 0.204(V)

Display range (mm)

275.8(H) x 178.0(V)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-17

1 Hardware Overview

1.5.2

1.5 TFT Color Display

FL Inverter Board

The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module.
Table 1-5 lists the FL inverter board specifications.
Table 1-5 FL inverter board specifications
Item

Specifications
G71C00011221

Input

Output

1-18

Voltage (VDC)

Power (W)

Voltage (Vrms)

750

Current (mArms)

6.00

Power (W/VA)

5/7

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.6 Power Supply

1.6

1 Hardware Overview

Power Supply

The power supply supplies many different voltages to the system board and performs the
following functions:
1. Judges that the DC power supply (AC adapter) is connected to the computer.
2. Detects DC output and circuit malfunctions.
3. Controls the display of battery icon and DC IN icon.
4. Turns the battery charging system on and off and detects a fully charged battery.
5. Turns the power supply on and off.
6. Provides the detection of a low battery.
7. Calculates the remaining battery capacity.
8. Controls the transmission of the status signal of the main battery.
The power supply output rating is specified in Table 1-6.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-19

1 Hardware Overview

1.6 Power Supply

Table 1-6 Power supply output rating
Power supply
Voltage
[V]

Power OFF
(Suspend
mode)

Power OFF
(Boot mode)

No
battery

PPV

1.500 0.300

CPU

PTV

1.05

CPU, GMCH, ICH7-M

1R5-P1V

1.5

CPU, GMCH, ICH7-M,
PCI-e Mini Card

1R8-B1V

1.8

Yes

GMCH, DDR2-SDRAM

2R5-P2V

2.5

GMCH, ICH7-M

LAN2R5-E2V

2.5

Yes

Yes / No

LAN

MR0R9-B0V

0.9

Yes

GMCH, DDR2-SDRAM

0R9-P0V

0.9

DDR2-SDRAM

Name

Object

P3V

3.3

Clock Generator, Thermal
Sensor, GMCH,
SDRAM(SPD), ICH7-M,
HDD, PC-Card Cont., PCCard Power, PCI-e Mini Card
(WLAN), FWH, LED, TPM,
LCD, AD1981HD

E3V

3.3

Yes

Yes / No

ICH7-M, PCI-e Mini Card
(WLAN), MDC, Serial Flash,
Finger Sensor

S3V

3.3

Yes

EC/KBC

FM-P3V

3.3

Flash Media

BT-P3V

3.3

Bluetooth

LAN-E3V

3.3

Yes

Yes / No

LAN

LAN1R2-E1V

1.2

Yes

Yes / No

LAN

P5V

ICH7-M, ODD, HDD, PCCard Power, LED, KB, PAD,
CRT, FAN, FL-Inv

E5V

Yes

Yes / No

ICH7-M, USB Power

M5V

Yes

LED

MCV

Yes

PSC

SND-P5V

AN12941A

A4R7-P4V

4.7

AD1981HD, AN12941A

R3V

2.0 -3.5

Yes

ICH7-M (RTC)

1-20

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.7 Batteries

1.7

1 Hardware Overview

Batteries

The computer has two types of batteries as follows:

Main battery

Real Time Clock (RTC) battery

The battery specifications are listed in Table 1-7.
Table 1-7 Battery specifications
Battery name

Material

Output voltage

Capacity

Main battery

G71C0004G710
G71C0004G810

Li-Ion

10.8 V

4,700 mAh

RTC battery

GDM710000041

Ni-MH

2.4 V

15 mAh

1.7.1

Main Battery

The removable main battery pack is the computer’s main power source when the AC adaptor
is not attached. The main battery maintains the state of the computer when the computer
enters in resume mode.
Battery Charge
When the AC adapter is connected, normal charging is used while the system is turned on
and quick charge is used while the system is turned off. Table 1-8 lists the charging time
required for charges.
Table 1-8 Time required for charges
Battery type

Power on (hours)

Power off (hours)

Main battery (4,700 mAh)

About 5.5 to 12.0

About 3.0

Charge is stopped in the following cases.
1. The main battery is fully charged.
2. The main battery is removed.
3. Main battery or AC adapter voltage is abnormal.
4. Charging current is abnormal.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-21

1 Hardware Overview

1.7 Batteries

Data preservation time
When turning off the power in being charged fully, the preservation time is as following
Table 1-9.
Table 1-9 Data preservation time
Battery type

Standby mode

Boot mode

6 days

60 days

Main battery (4,700 mAh)

1.7.2 RTC battery
The RTC battery provides power to keep the current date, time and other setup information
in memory while the computer is turned off. Table 1-10 lists the charging time and data
preservation period of the RTC battery.
Table 1-10 RTC battery charging/data preservation time
Status

1-22

Time

Charging Time (power on)

8 hours

Data preservation period (full charge)

30 days

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

1.8 AC Adapter

1.8

1 Hardware Overview

AC Adapter

The AC adapter is used to charge the battery.
Table 1-11 lists the AC adapter specifications.
Table 1-11 AC adapter specifications
Parameter

Specification
G71C0002SC10

Power

G71C0004A510

60W (Peak 75W)

Input voltage

100V/240V

Input frequency

50Hz to 60Hz

Input current

1.5A or less (100V-240V 4Aload)

Output voltage

15V

Output current

0A to 4A (At constant voltage mode)

Parameter

Specification
G71C00043310

Power

G71C00049510

75W (Peak 90W)

Input voltage

100V/240V

Input frequency

50Hz to 60Hz

Input current

1.5A or less (100V-240V)

Output voltage

15V

Output current

0A to 5A (At constant voltage mode)
5A to 6A (At surge load mode)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1-23

1 Hardware Overview

1-24

[CONFIDENTIAL]

1.8 AC Adapter

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Procedures

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2-ii

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Chapter 2

Contents

2.1

Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................2-1

2.2

Troubleshooting Flowchart ........................................................................................2-3

2.3

Power Supply Troubleshooting ..................................................................................2-7

2.4

System Board Troubleshooting ................................................................................2-19

2.5

USB FDD Troubleshooting ......................................................................................2-36

2.6

HDD Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................2-39

2.7

Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting ..............................................................2-44

2.8

Display Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................2-47

2.9

Optical Drive Troubleshooting.................................................................................2-49

2.10

Modem Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................2-51

2.11

LAN Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................2-53

2.12

Bluetooth Troubleshooting.......................................................................................2-54

2.13

Wireless LAN Troubleshooting ...............................................................................2-56

2.14

Sound Troubleshooting ............................................................................................2-58

2.15

Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting..........................................................................2-61

2.16

Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting .........................................................................2-62

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-iii

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Figures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart ..................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for debug port test.........................................................................2-22

Tables
Table 2-1 Battery icon..........................................................................................................2-7
Table 2-2 DC IN icon...........................................................................................................2-8
Table 2-3 Error code ..........................................................................................................2-10
Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status.................................................................2-23
Table 2-5 FDD error code and status .................................................................................2-37
Table 2-6 HDD error code and status ................................................................................2-42

2-iv

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.1 Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.1

Troubleshooting

Chapter 2 describes how to determine if a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer is
causing the computer to malfunction. The FRUs covered are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Power Supply
System Board
USB Floppy Disk Drive
Hard Disk Drive
Keyboard/Touch pad

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Display
Optical Drive
Modem
LAN
Bluetooth

11.
12.
13.
14.

Wireless LAN
Sound components
Bridge media Slot
Fingerprint sensor

The Test Program operations are described in Chapter 3. Detailed replacement procedures
are described in Chapter 4.
NOTE: Before replacing the system board, it is necessary to execute the subtest 03 DMI
Information save of the 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration in Chapter 3.
After replacing the system board, it is necessary to execute the subtest 04 DMI
Information recovery and subtest 08 System configuration display of the 3.3
Setting of the hardware configuration in Chapter 3.
Also update with the latest EC/KBC as described in Appendix H “EC/KBC
Rewrite Procedures”.

The implement for the Diagnostics procedures is referred to Chapter 3. Also, following
implements are necessary:
1. Phillips screwdrivers (For replacement procedures, Refer to Chapter 4)
2. Implements for debugging port check
• Toshiba MS-DOS system FD
• RS-232C cross cable
• Test board with debug port test cable
• PC for displaying debug port test result

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-1

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.1 Troubleshooting

There are following two types of connections in the figure of board and module connection
in and after 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting.
(1) Cable connection is described in the figure as line.
(2) Pin connection is described in the figure as arrow.
Connection of modem

2-2

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

2.2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Troubleshooting Flowchart

Use the flowchart in Figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which FRU malfunctions. Before
going through the flowchart steps, check the following:
Ask the user if a password is registered and, if it is, ask him or her to enter the
password.
Make sure that Windows® XP preinstalled by Toshiba is installed on the hard disk.
Operating systems not preinstalled by Toshiba can cause the computer malfunction.
Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.
Make sure the USB FDD and optical drive are empty.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-3

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)

2-4

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-5

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart

If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The
Running Test program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the
Log Utilities function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error, then perform the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures as follows:
1. If an error is detected on the system test, memory test, display test, CD-ROM/DVDROM test, expansion test, real timer test, Sound/LAN/Modem test, Bluetooth test or
IEEE1394 test, perform the System Board Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.
2. If an error is detected on the floppy disk test, perform the USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.5.
3. If an error is detected on the hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
4. If an error is detected on the keyboard test (DIAGNOSTICS TEST) and pressed key
display test (ONLY ONE TEST), perform the Keyboard/Touch pad Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.7.
5. If an error is detected on the display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.8.
6. If an error is detected on the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, perform the Optical Drive
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.9.
7. If an error is detected on the modem test, perform the Modem Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.10.
8. If an error is detected on the LAN test, perform the LAN Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.11.
9. If an error is detected on the Bluetooth test, perform the Bluetooth Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.12.
10. If an error is detected on the Wireless LAN test, perform the Wireless LAN
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.13.
11. If an error is detected on the Sound test, perform the Sound Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.14.
12. If a malfunction is detected on Bridge media, perform the Bridge media slot
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.15.
13. If a malfunction is detected on Fingerprint sensor, perform the Fingerprint sensor
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.16.

2-6

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

2.3

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Power Supply Troubleshooting

The power supply controls many functions and components. To determine if the power
supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other Procedures
as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Icons in the LCD Check
Procedure 2: Error Code Check
Procedure 3: Connection Check
Procedure 4: Charge Check
Procedure 5: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Icons in the LCD Check

The following Icons in the LCD indicate the power supply status:
Battery icon
DC IN icon
The Power Supply Controller (PSC) displays the power supply status through the Battery
icon and the DC IN icon in the LCD as listed in the tables below. To check the power supply
status, install a battery pack and connect an AC adaptor.
Table 2-1 Battery icon
Battery icon

Power supply status

Lights orange

Battery is charged and the external DC is input. It has no
relation with ON/OFF of the system power.

Lights Blue

Battery is fully charged and the external DC is input. It has
no relation with ON/OFF of the system power.

Blinks orange
(even intervals)

The battery level is low while the system power is ON.

Blinks orange once
(at being switched on)

The system is driven by only a battery and the battery level
is low.

Doesn’t light

Any condition other than those above.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-7

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Table 2-2 DC IN icon
DC IN icon

Power supply status

Lights Blue

DC power is being supplied from the AC adapter.

Flashes orange

There is a problem with the power supply. *1

Doesn’t light

Any condition other than those above.

*1 When the Power Supply Controller (PSC) detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks
orange. It shows an error code.
When the icon is blinking, perform the following procedure.
1.

Remove the battery pack and the AC adapter.

Re-attach the battery pack and the AC adapter.

If the icon is still blinking after the operation above, check the followings:
Check 1

If the DC IN icon blinks orange, go to Procedure 2.

Check 2

If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 3.

Check 3

If the battery icon does not light orange or blue, go to Procedure 4.

NOTE: Use a supplied AC adapter G71C0002SC10, G71C00043310 (2-pin)/
G71C0004A510, G71C00049510 (3-pin).

2-8

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Error Code Check

If the power supply microprocessor detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks orange. The
blink pattern indicates an error as shown below.
Start

Off for 2 seconds

Error code (8 bit)
“1”

On for one second

“0”

On for half second

Interval between data bits

Off for half second

The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Example: Error code 11h (Error codes are given in hexadecimal format.)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-9

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Check 1 Convert the DC IN icon blink pattern into the hexadecimal error code and compare
it to the tables below. Then go to Check 2.
Table 2-3 Error code

2-10

Error code

Where Error occurs

1*h

AC Adaptor

2*h

1st Battery

3*h

2nd Battery

4*h

S3V output

5*h

E5V output

6*h

E3V output

7*h

1R5-E1V output

8*h

1R8-B1V output

9*h

PPV output

A*h

PTV output

B*h

1R5-E1V output

C*h

1R8-B1V output

D*h

PPV output

E*h

PTV output

F*h

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Compare the patterns in the hexadecimal error code to the tables below.
AC Adaptor
Error code

Meaning

10h

AC Adaptor output voltage is over 16.5V.

11h

CommonDock voltage is over 16.5V.

12h

Current from the DC power supply is over 7.00A.

13h

Current from the DC power supply is over 0.5A when there is no load.

14h

Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.

1st Battery
Error code

Meaning

22h

1st battery discharge current over 0.5A when there is no load.

23h

1st battery charge current is over 3.9A in charging.

24h

Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.

25h

1st battery charge current is over 0.3A in not charging.

2nd Battery
Error code

Meaning

32h

2nd battery discharge current is over 0.5A when there is no load.

33h

2nd battery charge current is over 3.9A in charging.

34h

Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.

35h

2nd battery charge current is over 0.3A in not charging.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-11

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

S3V output
Error code

Meaning

40h

S3V voltage is 3.47V or less when the computer is powered on/off.

45h

S3V voltage is under 3.14V in normal conditions.

46h

S3V voltage is under 3.14V when the computer is booting up.

E5V output
Error code

Meaning

50h

E5V voltage is over 6.00V when the computer is powered on/off.

51h

E5V voltage is under 4.50V when the computer is powered on.

52h

E5V voltage is under 4.50V when the computer is booting up.

54h

E5V voltage is under 4.50V when EV power is maintained.

E3V output
Error code

Meaning

60h

E3V voltage is over 3.96V when the computer is powered on/off.

61h

E3V voltage is under 2.81V when the computer is powered on.

62h

E3V voltage is under 2.81V when the computer is booting up.

64h

E3V voltage is under 2.81 V when EV power is maintained.

1R5-E1V output
Error code

2-12

Meaning

70h

1R5-E1V voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.

71h

1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is powered on.

72h

1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is booting up.

74h

1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when EV power is maintained.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

1R8-B1V output
Error code

Meaning

80h

1R8-B1V voltage is over 2.16V when the computer is powered on/off.

81h

1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is powered on.

82h

1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is booting up.

84h

1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when BV power is maintained.

PPV output
Error code

Meaning

90h

PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.

91h

PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is powered on.

92h

PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is booting up.

PTV output
Error code

Meaning

A0h

PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.

A1h

PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is powered on.

A2h

PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is booting up.

1R5-E1V output
Error code

Meaning

B0h

1R5-E1V voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.

B1h

1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is powered on.

B2h

1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when the computer is booting up.

B3h

1R5-E1V voltage is under 1.275V when EV power is maintained.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-13

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

1R8-B1V output
Error code

Meaning

C0h

1R8-B1V voltage is over 2.16V when the computer is powered on/off.

C1h

1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is powered on.

C2h

1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when the computer is booting up.

C4h

1R8-B1V voltage is under 1.53V when BV power is maintained.

PPV output
Error code

Meaning

D0h

PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.

D1h

PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is powered on.

D2h

PPV voltage is under 0.32V when the computer is booting up.

PTV output
Error code

Meaning

E0h

PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.

E1h

PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is powered on.

E2h

PTV voltage is under 0.89V when the computer is booting up.

Miscellaneous
Error code
F0h

2-14

Meaning
The sub clock does not oscillate.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Check 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

In the case of error code 10h or 12h:
Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into
the DC IN 15 V socket and wall outlet. If the cables are connected correctly,
go to the following step:
Connect a new AC adaptor and/or AC power cord, if necessary. If the error
still exists, go to Procedure 5.

Check 3

In the case of error code 22h to 25h:
Make sure the battery pack is correctly installed in the computer. If the
battery pack is correctly installed, go to the following step:
Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the error still exists, go to
Procedure 5.

Check 4

For any other error, go to Procedure 5.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-15

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Connection Check

The power supply wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform Check 1.
Check 1

Disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. Check the power cable for
breaks. If the power cord is damaged, connect a new AC power cord. If there is
no damage, go to Check 2.

Check 2

Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the
DC-IN jack socket and AC adaptor inlet/wall outlet, respectively. If these cables
are connected correctly, go to Check 3.

Check 3

Make sure the DC IN jack is firmly connected to the connector CN8800 on the
system board.
• If the DC IN jack is not firmly connected, go to Procedure 5.
• If it is connected, go to Check 4.

Check 4

Use a multimeter to make sure the AC adaptor output voltage is close to 15 V. If
the output is several percent lower than 15 V, go to Check 5. If the output is close
to 15 V, go to Check 6.

Check 5

Connect a new AC adaptor or AC power cord.
• If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 5.
• If the battery icon does not light, go to Check 6.

Check 6

Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.

2-16

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 4

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Charge Check

Check 1

Make sure the AC adaptor and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC IN
socket and the wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, replace the AC
adaptor (and/or AC power cord, if necessary).

Check 2

Make sure the battery is properly installed. If the battery is properly installed, go
to Check 3.

Check 3

The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the
battery pack. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.

Check 4

The battery’s temperature is too hot or cold. Return the temperature to a normal
operating condition. If the battery pack still is not charged, go to Check 5.

Check 5

Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack still is not charged,
go to Procedure 5.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-17

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 5

2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting

Replacement Check

The system board processor module may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. Check the
connection between the AC adaptor and system board and connection. After checking the
connections, perform the following Check 1:
When AC adapter is connected:
Check 1

AC adapter may be faulty. Replace the AC adapter with a new one. If the problem
still occurs, perform Check 2.

Check 2

System board may be faulty. Replace the system board with a new one.

When AC adapter is not connected:
(When driving with battery pack)
Check 1

Battery pack may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 2.

Check 2

System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one.

2-18

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2.4

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

System Board Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the system board and CPU are defective or not
functioning properly. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Debugging Port Check (Boot Mode)
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-19

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 1

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Message Check

When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. The IRT tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.
If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.
If there is no error message, go to Procedure 2.
If Toshiba MS-DOS or Windows XP is properly loaded, go to Procedure 3.
Check 1

If one of the following error messages appears on the screen, press F1 as the
message instructs. These errors occur when the system configuration preserved in
the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the same as the actual
configuration or when the data is lost.
If you press F1 as the message instructs, returns all system settings to their default
values. Then the system reboots.
If error message (b) appears often when the power is turned on, replace the RTC
battery. If any other error message displays, perform Check 2.

Check 2

(a)

*** Bad HDD type ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(b)

*** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is
inconsistent ***
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time ......

(c)

*** Bad configuration ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(d)

*** Bad memory size ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(e)

*** Bad time function ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

(g)

*** Bad check sum (ROM) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......

If the following error message is displayed on the screen, press any key as the
message instructs.
The following error message appears when data stored in RAM under the resume
function is lost because the battery has become discharged or the system board is
damaged. Go to Procedure 3.
WARNING:

RESUME FAILURE.

PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.

If any other error message displays, perform Check 3.

2-20

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Check 3

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system
stops or an error message appears.
If one of the following error messages (1) through (15), (20) or (21) appears, go to
Procedure 4.
If the error message (16) appears, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.7.
If the error message (17) or (18) appears, go to the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
If the error message (19) appears, go to the Optical Drive Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.9.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)

PIT ERROR
MEMORY REFRESH ERROR
TIMER CH.2 OUT ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY PARITY ERROR
VRAM ERROR
SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR
SYSTEM MEMORY PARITY ERROR
MEMORY ERROR
EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR
DMA PAGE REGISTER ERROR
DMAC #1 ERROR
DMAC #2 ERROR
PIC #1 ERROR
PIC #2 ERROR
KBC ERROR
HDC ERROR
Built-in HDD ERROR
CD-ROM ERROR
TIMER INTERRUPT ERROR
RTC UPDATE ERROR

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-21

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Debugging Port Check (Boot Mode)

Check the D port status by a debug port test. The tool for debug port test is shown below.

Figure 2-1 A set of tool for debug port test
The test procedures are follows:
1. Connect the debug port test cable to the connector CN3490 of the system board. For
disassembling to connect the test cable, refer to Chapter 4.
2. Connect the debug port test cable and RS-232C cross-cable to the test board.
3. Connect the RS-232C Cross-cable to the PC that displays the test results.

4. Boot the computer in MS-DOS mode.
5. Execute GETDPORT.COM in the text menu in CPU REAL mode. (Insert the FD for
starting D port into FDD and input “FD starting drive:>dport”.)
The D port status is displayed in the following form;

6. When the D port status is FFFFh (normal status), go to Procedure 4.
When the D port status falls into any status in Table 2-4, execute Check 1.

2-22

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (1/10)
D port status
Boot block

Inspection items

Details

Permission of A20 and Clear of
software reset bit
Prohibition of APIC
Initialization of MCH and ICH
Initialization of Super I/O
Initialization of debug port
Dummy read of 3rd Bus data
Setting of printer port

F000H

BTBK_START
Only PIT CH0 initialization
(for HOLD_ON)
BIOS rewrite factor flag initialization
CHECK SUM CHECK

Transition to protected mode
Boot block checksum (skip when returned to S3)
(halts when error)
Checksum other than boot block (skip when
returned to S3)

F001H

BTBK_CALC_CHKSUM_END
EC/KBC rewrite check

If “rewrite” is requested, go to “BIOS rewrite
process”

Key input
When a key is pressed, check if it is
Tilde key or Tab key
F002H

BTBK_INI_SC_START
Initialization of SC

F003H

BTBK_INI_SC_ERR

F004H

BTBK_SC_HW_FAILURE

F005H

BTBK_INI_KBC_END
BIOS rewrite request check

F006H

If Checksum check error occurred on except
Boot Block or rewrite is required by user, go to
“BIOS rewrite process”.

BTBK_ENTER_CHK_BIOS_SIGN
BIOS signature check

F007H

BTBK_ENTER_SYSTEM_BIOS
Transits to System BIOS IRT
BIOS rewrite process

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Initialization of ICHM. D31

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-23

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (2/10)
D port status

Inspection items

(F007H)

Details
DRAM configuration
Permission of cache (L1 cache only)
Memory clear

F008H

BTBK_INI_MEM_END
Transition to real mode and copy of
BIOS to RAM

F009H

BTBK_CHG_RAM_BIOS
Saving key scan code

F00AH

BTBK_INI_VGA_END
Controlling fan
Initializing sound items
(for BEEP)

Permission of system speaker
Releasing mute
Making the volume max (model that can control
volume)

When request BIOS, EC/KBC
rewriting
F00BH

Blinks green (cycle:2s, on:1s, off:1s)

BTBK_CANT_UPDATE_BIOS
When BIOS renewal is prohibited

Blinks orange (cycle: 2s(On:1s,Off:1s))

Key input

Prohibition of USB
BEEP
Waiting for key input

Reading CHGBIOSA.EXE /
CHGFIRMA.EXE

FDC reset
Setting parameters for 2HD(1.44MB)
Reading of first sector, If it is the data of 1.44MB
(2HD), the media type is definite.
Setting of parameters for 2DD (720KB)
Retrieval of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” from the root
directory.
Directory start header and calculates the sector
Read 1 sector of the root directory
Retrieval of entry of “CHGBIOSA.EXE”
/“CHGFIRMA.EXE” from the sector read.
Reading of EXE header of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” and
“CHGFIRMA.EXE” Key input when error occurred
Execution of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” and
“CHGFIRMA.EXE”

2-24

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (3/10)
D port status
F100H

Inspection items

Details

IRT_START
Process of cache control for
HyperThreading

Prohibition of cache
Initialization of H/W (before DRAM
recognition)

Initialization of MCHM
Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func0

Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func1
Initialization of USB.Func0,1,2,7
Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func3
Initialization of ICH4M.D31.Func5
Initialization of FLUTE
Initialization of PIT channel 1
F101H

F102H

(Setting the refresh interval to “30μs”)

IRT_INI_SPREG_END

Check of DRAM type and size
(at cold boot)

When unsupported memory is connected,
becoming HLT after beep sound (HLT when
DRAM size is 0)

SM-RAM stack area test

HLT When it can not be used as a stack

Cache configuration
Cache permission (L1/L2 Cache)
CMOS access test (at cold boot)

(HLT when an error is detected)

Battery level check of CMOS
CMOS checksum check
Initialization of CMOS data (1)
Setting of IRT status

(Setting of boot status and IRT busy flag, The rest
bits are 0)

Storing DRAM size in CMOS
Cache configuration
F103H

IRT_RSM_BRANCH
Resume branch (at cold boot)

Not resume when a CMOS error occurred
Not resume when resume status code is not set
Resume error check
S3 returning error (ICH)
Resume error F170 RSM_UNKNOWN_ERR

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-25

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (4/10)
D port status

Inspection items

Details
SM-RAM checksum check
Resume error F173H RSM_SMRAM_ERR
Check of memory configuration change
Resume error F174H RSM_SYSMEM_ERR
RAM area checksum check in system BIOS
Resume error F179H SM_RAMBIOS_ERR
Expansion memory checksum check
Resume error F176H RSM_EXTMEM_ERR
PnP RAM checksum check
Resume error F177H RSM_PNPRAM_ERR

(F103)

Transition to RESUME-MAIN
Resume error process

Reset of CPU clock to low
Prohibition of all SMI
Clearance of resume status
Return to ROM
Turning area of C0000h to EFFFFh to PCI
(Prohibition of DRAM)
Setting of resume error request

Copying ROM/RAM of system BIOS
F104H

(HLT, when error occurs)

IRT_BIOS_SIGN_CHK
Check of BIOS signature
(At COLD Boot)

F105H

IRT_CHG_RAM_BIOS_END
SMRAM initialization
Check of CPU for HyperThreading
Microcode update
APIC initialization
WakeUp factor check
SMRAM base rewriting and CPU
state map saving for BIOS
Permission of SMI based on ASMI

2-26

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (5/10)
D port status
F106H

Inspection items

Details

IRT_INI_SMBASE_END
Initialization of devices which
need initialization before PCI bus
initialization

PIT test (Cold boot only) and initialization
Setting of test pattern to channel 0 of PIT#0
Check whether the set test pattern can be read
Initialization of PIT channel 0
(Setting of timer interruption interval to 55ms)
Initialization of PIT channel 2
(Setting of the sound generator frequency to 664Hz)
Test of PIT channel 1
(Check whether the refresh signal works normally in
30 micro-s refresh interval) HLT, when the time is out
Test of PIT channel 2
(Check whether the speaker gate works normally)
CPU clock measurement
Check of parameter block A
Permission of SMI except auto-off function
Control of excess of rated input power
Battery discharging current control (1CmA)
AC adapter rated over current control
Dividing procedures for time measuring by IRT
Setting for clock generator
CPU Initialization
Judgment of CPU type
Check of supporting Geyserville
Make CPU clock High
Setting of Graphics Aperture Size

F107H

IRT_CHK_INI_SYS1_END
Saving memory configuration to
buffer
Reading of EC version
Update of flash ROM type
Judging of destination (Japan or
other than Japan) based on DMI
data
CMOS default setting check

Sets default setting if bad battery or bad checksum
(ROM, CMOS) is detected

ACPI table initialization
(for execution of option ROM)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-27

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (6/10)
D port status
(F107H)

Inspection items
Initialization of devices which need
initialization before PCI bus
initialization

Details
AC97’ control
Initialization of temperature control information
KBC initialization
VGA display off, Reset control
Sound initialization
PC multi-box status acquisition
HC initialization, USB device connection
recognition and initialization
Control of built-in LAN permission/prohibition

PIC initialization
PIC test
Password Initialization
F108H

IRT_CHK_INI_SYS2_END
PCI bus initialization

(connection of DS Bus)

Initialization of LAN information
Check of WakeUp factor
F109H

IRT_INI_PCI_END
Task generation for waiting
INIT_PCI completion
CMOS data initialization (2)
PnP initialization
Setting of setup items
Waiting for the completion of Multibox status check
H/W setting based on resource

F10AH

IRT_MK_SYSRES_END
Task generation for waiting PnP
resource making completion
Control of serial interrupt (Execute
before using interrupt)
PnP H/W initialization

PC card slot initialization
SIO initialization (for models supporting SIO)
FIR initialization (for models supporting FIR)

PCI automatic configuration

Making of work for automatic configuration
Acquisition of PCI IRQ

2-28

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (7/10)
D port status

Inspection items

(F10AH)

Details
Configuration
Saving of VGA configuration result

F10BH

IRT_PCI_CONF_END
Task generation for waiting PCI_CONFIGURATION
completion
Initialization of H/W needed after
PCI configuration

Printer port setting (for models supporting printer)
HDD initialization sequence start
FDD initialization sequence start (for models
supporting printer internal FDD)

Enabling power off
Output code generation
F10CH

IRT_CHK_INI_SYS3_END
FIRST_64KB_CHECK

F10DH

IRT_CHK_F64KB_END
INIT_INT_VECTOR

F10EH

(Initialization of vectors)

IRT_INI_VECT_END
INIT_NDP

F10FH

(Check of first 64KB memory)

(Initialization of NDP)

IRT_INI_NDP_END
INIT_SYSTEM
(Initialization of system)

Storing of CMOS error status to
IRT_ERR_STS_BUF
Timer initialization start
EC initialization & Reading of battery information
Update of system BIOS (Update of EDID information
for LCD)

F110H

IRT_INI_SYS_END
INIT_DISPLAY

F111H

(Waiting for VGA chip initialization completion, VGA
BIOS initialization)

IRT_VGA_POST_START
VGA POST

F112H

IRT_VGA_POST_END

F113H

IRT_INI_DISP_END
DISP_LOGO

F114H

(Displaying logo)

IRT_DISP_LOGO_END
SYS_MEM_CHECK

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

(Check of convention memory)(Boot)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-29

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (8/10)
D port status
F115H

Inspection items
IRT_SYSMEM_CHK_END
EXT_MEM_CHECK

F116H

F118H

Exception check in the protected
mode

Dport=F117h when error occurs

INIT_SYS_MEM

Initialization of conventional memory (Reboot)

IRT_INI_SYSMEM_END

(Initialization of DMAC) (Boot)

IRT_CHK_DMAC_END
INIT_DMAC

F11BH

(Check of DMA Page Register) (Boot)

IRT_DMA_PAGE_END
CHECK_DMAC

F11AH

(Check of exception in the protected mode)(Boot)

IRT_EXTMEM_CHK_END

CHK_DMA_PAGE
F119H

Details

(Initialization of DMA) (Boot)

IRT_INI_DMAC_END
CHECK_PRT

(Check of printer existence) (For models supporting
Printer port)

IRT_CHK_PRT_END
F11CH
CHECK_SIO
F11DH

(Check of SIO) (model supporting SIO)

IRT_CHK_SIO_END
BOOT_PASSWORD

(Check of password)
Waiting for FDD initialization completion
(In the case of “Reboot”)
Waiting for HDD initialization completion
Check of key input during IRT (waiting for KBC
initialization completion)
Initialization of ATA priority
(In the case of “Boot”)
BM loading process (for models supporting
fingerprint authentication)
Initialization of BM (for models supporting
fingerprint authentication)
Check of key input during IRT (waiting for KBC
initialization completion)
Input of password
BM releasing (for models supporting fingerprint
authentication)

2-30

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (9/10)
D port status

Inspection items

F11EH

IRT_WAIT_SMI_SEQ_END

F11FH

IRT_PASSWORD_END
EX_IO_ROM_CHECK

F120H

Details

(Check of option I/O ROM)

IRT_EX_IO_ROM_END
PRE_BOOT_SETUP

Saving of value in 40:00h
(for SIO saving/restoring)
Setting of font address for resume password
Setting of repeat parameter for USB KB
Final check of key input during IRT
Storing of T_SHADOW_RAM_SIZE
Update of system resource just before booting
Rewriting of memory map data of INT15h E820h
function
Waiting for AC-Link initialization completion
Renewal of table for DMI
Copying ACPI table to uppermost of extension
memory
Waiting for completion of setting clock generator
When error occurred, halt at F121
IRT_CLOCK_GENERATOR_ERR
Waiting for completion of initialization of Serial
port (for models supporting SIO)
Cancel of NMI Mask
TIT check sum
Clear of the IRT flag of Runtime side
Update of check sum of Runtime side
Hibernation branch (for models supporting BIOS
Hibernation)
Initialization of Bluetooth (for models supporting
Bluetooth)
Check for existence of target maintenance card
Prohibition of unused PC card not used
Setting Wakeup status data for ACPI
HW initialization just before booting, Waiting for
initialization completion

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-31

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Table 2-4 Debug port (Boot mode) error status (10/10)
D port status
F122H

Inspection items

Details

IRT_SC_INIT_START

F123H

Notifies the DVI connection status to VGA BIOS (for
models supporting DVI)
Setting of battery save mode
Setting of date
Waiting for Bluetooth initialization completion
(for models supporting Bluetooth)
Update of DMI Wakeup factor, Update of SM-BIOS
structure table
PCI device configuration space close
Cache control
Renewal of parameter block A
Process for CPU
Make the CPU clock to be set by SETUP
Waiting of motor-off completion of disabled HDD
Final decision of USB FDD drive information
Post processing of PRE_BOOT_SETUP
Clear of PWRBTN_STS
Enabling POWER Button

F124H

IRT_PRE_BOOT_SETUP_END

F125H

IRT_WAIT_DISP_LOGO_START
Clear of IRT status
Renewal of check sum of
Runtime side

FFFFH

IRT_POST_END

NOTE: Status outputted by the test means the last error detected in the debug port test.

2-32

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Check 1

If the D port status F11DH or F120H is displayed, go to HDD Trouble shooting
Procedure in Section 2.6.

Check 2

If any other D port status error code is displayed, perform Procedure 3.
D port error code is as follows:
Error code

Contents

F117H

Exception check error

F121H

Clock generator error

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-33

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Execute the following tests from the Diagnostic Test Menu. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform these tests.
1. System test
2. Memory test
3. Keyboard test
4. Display test
5. Floppy Disk test
6. Async test
7. Hard Disk test
8. Real Timer test
9. NDP test
10. Expansion test
11. CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test
12. Only One test
13. Wireless LAN test
14. Sound test
15. LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 4.

2-34

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 4

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Replacement Check

The system board connectors may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform Check 1.
Check 1

Visually check for the following:
a) Cracked or broken connector housing
b) Damaged connector pins
If their connectors are in good condition, but there is still a problem, go to Check
2.

Check 2

The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-35

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.5

2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting

USB FDD Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the USB FDD is functioning properly. Perform
the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: USB FDD Head Cleaning Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

USB FDD Head Cleaning Check

USB FDD head cleaning operation details are given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.
Connect a USB floppy disk drive to a computer and insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB
floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Clean the USB FDD heads using the
cleaning kit. If the USB FDD still does not function properly after cleaning, go to Procedure
2.
If the test program cannot be executed, go to Procedure 3.

2-36

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB FDD, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to
Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test procedures.
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-5. Make sure
the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled. If any other
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.
Table 2-5 FDD error code and status
Code

Check 1

Status

01h

Bad command error

02h

Address mark not found

03h

Write protected

04h

Record not found

06h

Media removed

08h

DMA overrun error

09h

DMA boundary error

10h

CRC error

20h

FDC error

40h

Seek error

60h

Not drive error

80h

Time out error

EEh

Write buffer error

FFh

Data compare error

If the following message appears, disable the write protect tab on the floppy disk.
If any other message appears, perform Check 2.
Write protected

Check 2

Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-37

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3

2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The USB FDD is connected to the System Board.
Check 1

When using the USB port, make sure the USB FDD cable is firmly connected to
CN4612 or CN4614 on the System.

If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2.
If any of the connections is damaged, or there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The USB FDD or USB FDD cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with
a new one. If the USB FDD is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

Replace the System board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.

2-38

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.6

HDD Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the HDD is functioning properly. Perform the
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Partition Check
Procedure 2: Message Check
Procedure 3: Format Check
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when you execute the HDD
troubleshooting procedures. Transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy
disks or other storage media.
Procedure 1

Partition Check

Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and restart the computer with U key holding down.
Perform the following checks:
Check 1

Type C: and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you
can change to drive C, go to Check 3.

Check 2

Type FDISK and press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed, go to Check 3. If drive C is not listed, return to
the FDISK menu and choose the option to create a DOS partition on drive C.
Restart the computer from the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk. If the problem still
exists, go to Procedure 2.

Check 3

If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active
partition for drive C. Restart the computer and then go to Procedure 2.

Check 4

Remove the FD and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 3.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-39

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting

Message Check

When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. When the test detects an error, an error message is displayed on the
screen.
Make sure no floppy disk is in the USB FDD. Turn on the computer and check the message
on the screen. When an OS starts from the 2.5” HDD, go to Procedure 3. Otherwise, start
with Check 1 below and perform the other checks as instructed.
Check 1

If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.
Built-in HDD ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)

or
CD-ROM ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)

Check 2

If either of the following messages appears, go to Check 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 4.
Insert system disk in drive
Press any key when ready .....

or
Non-System disk or disk error
Replace and press any key when ready

Check 3

Using the SYS command of the MS-DOS, transfer the system to the 2.5” HDD. If
the system is not transferred, go to Procedure 3. Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for
detailed operation.
If the following message appears on the display, the system program has been
transferred to the HDD.
System Transferred

If an error message appears on the display, perform Check 4.
Check 4

2-40

2.5” HDD(s) and the connector(s) of system board may be defective (Refer to the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures for disassembling.). Insert
HDD(s) to the connector(s) firmly. If it is (or they are) firmly connected, go to
Procedure 3.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 3

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Format Check

The computer’s HDD is formatted using the MS-DOS FORMAT program or the physical
format program of the test program. To format the HDD, start with Check 1 below and
perform the other steps as required.
Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for the operation of MS-DOS. For the format by the test
program, refer to the Chapter 3.
Check 1

Format the 2.5” HDD using MS-DOS FORMAT command. Type as FORMAT
C: / S/U.
If the 2.5” HDD can not be formatted, perform Check 2.

Check 2

Using the MS-DOS FDISK command, set the 2.5” HDD partition. If the partition
is not set, go to Check 3. If it is set, format the 2.5” HDD using MS-DOS
FORMAT command.

Check 3

Using the Diagnostic Disk, format the 2.5” HDD with a format option (physical
format). If HDD is formatted, set the 2.5” HDD partition using MS-DOS FDISK
command.
If you cannot format the 2.5” HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to
Procedure 4.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-41

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about
the HDD test program.
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed.
Replace the HDD with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. The error codes and statuses are listed in Table 2-6. If an error code is not
generated or the problem still exists, go to Procedure 5.
Table 2-6 HDD error code and status
Code

2-42

Status

01h

Bad command error

02h

Address mark not found

04h

Record not found

05h

HDC not reset

07h

Drive not initialized

08h

Overrun error (DRQ)

09h

DMA boundary error

0Ah

Bad sector error

0Bh

Bad track error

10h

ECC error

11h

ECC recover enable

12h

DMA CRC error

20h

HDC error

40h

Seek error

80h

Time out error

AAh

Drive not ready

BBh

Undefined error

CCh

Write fault

E0h

Status error

EEh

Access time error

DAh

No HDD

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 5

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The HDD may be disconnected, or the HDD, HDD cable or system board may be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the HDD is firmly connected to CN1850 on the system board.

If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The HDD may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists, perform Check
3.

Check 3

The System board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-43

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.7

2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting

Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting

To determine if the computer’s keyboard or touch pad is functioning properly, perform the
following procedures. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Execute the Keyboard Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform the test program.
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, the keyboard is functioning
properly.

2-44

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting
Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The keyboard, touch pad or sensor/switch board may be disconnected or damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, and perform the following checks:
1. If the keyboard malfunctions, start with Check 1.
2. If the touch pad malfunctions, start with Check 3.
3. If the SW membrane malfunctions, start with Check 6.
Check 1

Make sure the keyboard cable is securely connected to CN3230 on the system
board.

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The keyboard or its cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following
the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 8.

Check 3

Make sure the touch pad cable is firmly connected to CN3240 on the system
board.

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 4.
Check 4

The touch pad may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 5.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-45

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.7 Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting

Check 5

The touch pad cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 8.

Check 6

Make sure the SW cable is firmly connected to CN3260 on the system board.

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 7.
Check 7

The SW membrane may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 8.

Check 8

The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

2-46

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.8 Display Troubleshooting

2.8

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Display Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the computer’s display is functioning properly.
Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.
Procedure 1: External Monitor Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Cable Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

External Monitor Check

Connect an external monitor and turn on the computer. If there is no problem on it, the
internal LCD may be defective. Go to Procedure 3. If there is any problem on the external
monitor, the system board may be defective. Go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The Display Test program is stored on the computer’s Diagnostics disk. This program checks
the display controller on the system board. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the computer’s
floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics for details. If an error is detected, go to Procedure 3.
Procedure 3
Check 1

Connector Check and Cable Check

The LCD, FL, FL Inverter Board and System Board are connected by the HV
cable and LCD/FL cable as shown bellow. Check the connections. The
connectors may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-47

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.8 Display Troubleshooting

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If there is still an error,
go to Procedure 4.
Procedure 4

Replacement Check

The FL, FL inverter board, LCD module, and system board are connected to display circuits.
Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, for
instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the following checks:
1. If characters or graphics are not displayed clearly, perform Check 1.
2. If some screen functions do not operate properly, perform Check 2.
3. If the FL remains lit when the display is closed, perform Check 4.
Check 1

Replace the FL with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check2.

Check 2

Replace the LCD module with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 3.

Check 3

Replace the display cable (FL cable and LCD cable) with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If
the problem still exists, perform Check 4.

Check 4

The display controller on the system board may be damaged. Replace the system
board with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures.

2-48

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting

2.9

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Optical Drive Troubleshooting

This section describes how to determine if the optical drive (DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW or
DVD Super Multi drive) is functioning properly. Perform the steps below starting with
Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.
For the test, prepare test Media.
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run
the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the
diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, go to Procedure 2.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-49

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2

2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The optical drive (DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW or DVD Super Multi drive) is connected to the
system board. The connectors may be disconnected from the system board or may be
damaged. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the drive to test is firmly connected to CN1810 on the system board.

If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2

The drive may be defective or damaged. Replace the drive with a new one. If
there is still an error, go to Check 3.

Check 3

Replace the system board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.

2-50

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.10 Modem Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.10 Modem Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s modem is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Insert the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEEE1394 test program in the USB floppy disk drive,
turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more
information about the diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the Sound/Modem/LAN test, go to Procedure 2.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-51

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2

2.10 Modem Troubleshooting

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The Modem is installed as a MDC (Modem Daughter Card). If the modem malfunctions,
there may be a bad connection between the MDC and the system board. Or the MDC, system
board or their connectors might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the MDC is firmly connected to CN3010 on the system board and the
Modem cable is firmly connected to the Modem jack.

If connections are disconnected, connect them firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
the modem is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2

The MDC may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the modem is still not functioning
properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The MDC cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the modem is still
not functioning properly, perform Check 4.

Check 4

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

2-52

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.11 LAN Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.11 LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s LAN is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Execute the LAN test program available as part of the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394
test program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to
perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The RJ-45 jack with LAN cable is connected to the system board. If the LAN malfunctions,
the system board might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following check:
Check 1

Make sure the RJ-45 jack is firmly connected to CN4100 on the system board.

If the connectors are disconnected, connect it firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
the LAN function is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-53

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting

2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s Bluetooth is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Transmitting-Receiving Check

Make sure the wireless switch on the left side of the computer is turned “On”. If it is not,
slide the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Check 1

Execute Bluetooth test program. Perform the test following the instructions
described in Chapter 3, Bluetooth Test Program. You will need a second
computer that can communicate by the Bluetooth.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working. If the computer
does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.

2-54

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connection Check

The Bluetooth function wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure that the wireless communication switch is “On”.
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 2.

Check 2

Make sure the Bluetooth module is firmly connected to the connector CN4400 on
the system board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the Bluetooth module is still
not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

Make sure the Bluetooth antenna cable is firmly connected to the Bluetooth
module.
If the Bluetooth antenna cable is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the Bluetooth
module is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.

Procedure 3

Replacement Check

The Bluetooth antenna, Bluetooth module, sound board and system board are connected to
the circuits. Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the
following checks:
Check 1

The Bluetooth module may be defective or damaged. Replace the Bluetooth
module with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
If the Bluetooth is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

The Bluetooth antenna may be defective or damaged. Replace the Bluetooth
antenna with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. If the Bluetooth is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-55

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting

2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s Wireless LAN is functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antenna Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Transmitting-Receiving Check

Make sure the wireless switch on the left side of the computer is turned “On”. If it is not,
slide the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test
program.
Check 1

Execute test program for the wireless LAN function to check the transmittingreceiving function of the wireless LAN. You will need a second computer that can
communicate by the wireless LAN.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working.
If the computer does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.

2-56

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Antenna Connection Check

The wireless LAN wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1

Make sure the wireless LAN card is firmly connected to CN2600 on the system
board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the wireless LAN card is still
not functioning properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

Make sure the wireless LAN antenna cables are firmly connected to the wireless
LAN card.
If the wireless LAN antenna cables are disconnected, connect them firmly. If the
wireless LAN card is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.

Procedure 3

Replacement Check

The wireless LAN antenna, wireless LAN board and the system board are connected to the
circuits. Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the
following checks:
Check 1

The wireless LAN card may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still
exists, perform Check 2.

Check 2

The wireless LAN antenna may be defective or damaged. Replace the antenna
with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the
problem still exists, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the board with a new
one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the
display again.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-57

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.14 Sound Troubleshooting

2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
NOTE: On the Operation Systems other than Windows/Vivace, sounds come form the
internal speaker, even if a headphone connected.
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s sound functions are functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connecor Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check

Insert the Sound test program in the USB floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the
test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for details.
If an error is detected, go to Procedure 2.

2-58

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
Procedure 2

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connector Check

The sound function-wiring diagram is shown below:

Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks:
1

If the stereo speakers do not work correctly, perform Check 1.

If the headphone does not work correctly, perform Check 2.

If the microphones do not work correctly, perform Check 3.

Check 1

If the stereo speakers do not work properly, the speaker cable may be
disconnected. Make sure the speaker cable is firmly connected to CN6170 on the
system board. If the stereo speakers are still not functioning properly, go to
Procedure 3.

Check 2

If the headphone does not work properly, the headphone cable may be
disconnected. Make sure the headphone cable is firmly connected to J6310 on the
system board. If the sound function still does not work properly, Procedure 3.

Check 3

If the microphones do not work properly, the internal microphone cable or
external microphone cable may be disconnected. When the internal microphone
malfunctions, make sure the internal microphone cable is firmly connected to
CN6050 on the system board. When using the external microphone, make sure the
external microphone cable is firmly connected to J6051 on the system board.
If the microphones are still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-59

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3

2.14 Sound Troubleshooting

Replacement Check

Check 1

If the stereo speakers do not sound properly, the right or left speaker may be
defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the stereo speakers still do not
work properly, go to Check 3.

Check 2

If the internal microphones do not work properly, the microphone may be
defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the microphone still does not
work properly, go to Check 3.

Check 3

If the headphone or external microphone does not sound properly, the system
board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a new one.

2-60

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s SD card functions are functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Check on Windows XP
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1

Check on Windows XP

Insert a Bridge media (SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick Pro/
xD Picture card/Multimedia card) into the slot. Check if the installed Windows recognizes
automatically the Bridge media and the data in the Bridge media can be read.
If the card is not recognized or data are not red, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The Bridge media is connected to IS2101 on the system board.
Bridge media supports SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick Pro/
xD Picture card/Multimedia card.

Check 1

The Bridge media and system board may be disconnected. Make sure the Bridge
media is firmly inserted to IS2101 on the system board. If not, insert it firmly. If
the Bridge media is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.

Check 2

The Bridge media may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures. If the problem continues, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-61

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
CAUTION: To delete the account for confirming the fingerprint operation, it is
necessary to log on by the account with the management authority. If the
password has been set to log on, ask the Log-ON password to the user.
To check if the Fingerprint sensor works correctly or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
When failed in Procedure 1 to Procedure 3, execute Procedure 4.
Procedure 1: Setting Windows Log-ON password
Procedure 2: Registration of fingerprint
Procedure 3: Authentication of fingerprint
Procedure 4: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: Scan your finger shown below.
1. Lay your finger straight to the sensor and put lightly the first joint of your
finger at the centerline of the fingerprint sensor.
2. Slide slowly your finger from the first joint to fingertip at constant speed.
When not recognized, adjust the speed.

Fingerprint
sensor

2-62

[CONFIDENTIAL]

Fingerprint
sensor

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
Procedure 1

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Setting Windows Log-ON password

1. Open [User Account] from [Control Panel].
2. Click [User Account].
3. Click the icon of the account (user’s name) that you want to set the password.
4. Click “Create Account”.
5. Type a password in “Type a new password”.
6. Press Tab key.
7. Type the password again.
8. Click “Create Password” button.
9. When “Do you want to make your files and folders private” appears in [Computer
administrator], click [Yes, Make Private].
Procedure 2

Registration of fingerprint

1. Logon by user’s account to register the fingerprint.
2. Open [Start] → [All Programs] → [Protector Suite QL] → [User Enrollment].
3. After displaying [User Enrollment], click [Next].

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-63

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

[User's Passport] appears in “Enter your password”. Click [Next].
When the finger print has been enrolled, [User’s Password] appears. Slide your finger
enrolled or type the password. Click [Next].
4

2-64

Type the Windows logon password in “Enter your password” and click [Next].
[User’s Password] appears.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Confirm that the box of [Run interactive tutorial] is checked (when proceeding wit
seeing Tutorial) and click [Next].

Watch the Video carefully, click [Next].

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-65

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

Put lightly your finger on the fingerprint sensor at the right side of the touchpad and
slide your finger toward you.

Slide your finger four times. Four boxes are filled with fingerprints. At this time,
when you click the [Replay video], you can watch the video that you have watched in
Procedure 6.

2-66

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

When you have failed in any time of four times reading and want to practice again,
click [Try again]. When you have fully succeeded in four times of reading, the
message of “Fully succeeded” appears.

Click [Next]. The display of [User’s Fingers]

Click the box you want to enroll.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-67

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

Put lightly the first joint of your finger you want to enroll on the fingerprint sensor and
slide your finger toward you. Enroll your finger three times. Every time your finger has
been successfully enrolled, one box is checked. When your finger has been successfully
enrolled three times, the message of “Succeeded” appears.

When you do not enroll your finger within two minutes after [User’s Fingerprint] has been
displayed, an error message appears. At the time, click [OK] and enroll your fingerprint.
When you attempt to enroll your finger that has been enrolled, you can not enroll. Enroll
your other finger again.
10 Enroll another finger in Procedure 9. Enroll two fingers at least.
11 The display that recommend you to register a password.
12 Click [OK] in the following display.

2-68

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

13 Type a backup password two times in the following display. (This password is different
from the password of Windows logon.)

14 Click [Next]. The [Finish] display appears.
15 Click [Finish], “Welcome” display appears.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-69

2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

Authentication of fingerprint

1. Turn on the computer to start up Windows.
2. In the Windows logon window, put lightly the first joint of your finger registered and slide
your finger toward you.

When authenticated, [Success] is displayed in the fingerprint authentication display.
When not authenticated well, warning message appears. If you fail continually ten times or
more, you can not use the fingerprint authentication about one minute.
When not authenticated, type the password to logon to Windows.

2-70

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
Procedure 4

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

Connector Check and Replacement Check

The Fingerprint sensor cable is connected to the connector CN9550 on the Fingerprint sensor
board and connector CN9520 on the system board.

Check 1

Check the Fingerprint sensor cable is firmly connected to the connector CN9550
on the Fingerprint sensor board and connector CN9520 on the system board. If
not, connect it firmly. If the Fingerprint sensor is still not functioning properly,
perform Check 2.

Check 2

The Fingerprint sensor cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the
problem persists, perform Check 3.

Check 3

The Fingerprint sensor board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the
problem persists, perform Check 4.

Check 4

The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-71

2 Troubleshooting Procedures

2-72

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Chapter 3
Tests and Diagnostics

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Tests and Diagnostics
3

3-ii

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Chapter 3
3.1

3.2

Contents

The Diagnostic Test ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1

Diagnostics menu ................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.2

H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool.................................. 3-3

3.1.3

Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-3

Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1

Diagnostics menu (T&D) ..................................................................... 3-5

3.2.2

H/W initial information setting tool ..................................................... 3-8

3.2.3

Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-8

3.3

Setting of the hardware configuration........................................................................ 3-9

3.4

Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11

3.5

Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12

3.6

System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14

3.7

Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16

3.8

Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17

3.9

Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18

3.10

Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21

3.11

Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23

3.12

Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25

3.13

Hard Disk Test ......................................................................................................... 3-26

3.14

Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29

3.15

NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31

3.16

Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32

3.17

CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34

3.18

Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-35

3.19

Hard Disk Test Detail Status.................................................................................... 3-38

3.20

ONLY ONE TEST................................................................................................... 3-40
3.20.1

Program Description .......................................................................... 3-40

3.20.2

Operations .......................................................................................... 3-40

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-iii

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.21

3.22

3.23

3.24

3.25

3.26

Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-47
3.21.1

Function Description .......................................................................... 3-47

3.21.2

Operations .......................................................................................... 3-47

Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-48
3.22.1

Function Description .......................................................................... 3-48

3.22.2

Operations .......................................................................................... 3-49

Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-50
3.23.1

Function Description .......................................................................... 3-50

3.23.2

Operations .......................................................................................... 3-50

Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-51
3.24.1

Function Description .......................................................................... 3-51

3.24.2

Operations .......................................................................................... 3-52

System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-56
3.25.1

Function Description .......................................................................... 3-56

3.25.2

Operations .......................................................................................... 3-57

Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros) ................................................................... 3-58
3.26.1

Setting the responder machine ........................................................... 3-59

3.26.2

Test procedure .................................................................................... 3-60

3.26.3

Contents of the test and errors............................................................ 3-61

3.27

Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)...................................................... 3-65

3.28

LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-69

3.29

3-iv

3.27.1

LAN test ............................................................................................. 3-69

3.27.2

Modem test ......................................................................................... 3-72

3.27.3

Bluetooth test...................................................................................... 3-73

3.27.4

IEEE1394 test..................................................................................... 3-83

Sound Test program................................................................................................. 3-84
3.29.1

Sound (Standard) test ......................................................................... 3-84

3.29.2

Sound (Legacy) test............................................................................ 3-86

3.29.3

CD Sound (Standard) test................................................................... 3-87

3.29.4

CD Sound (Legacy) test ..................................................................... 3-89

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30

SETUP ..................................................................................................................... 3-90
3.30.1

Function Description .......................................................................... 3-90

3.30.2

Accessing the SETUP Program.......................................................... 3-92

Tables
Table 3-1 Subtest names .................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names .................................................................... 3-35
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents...................................................... 3-38
Table 3-4 Error register contents........................................................................................ 3-39
Table 3-5 Error message.................................................................................................... 3-75
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) ....................................................... 3-76
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT).................................... 3-80
Table 3-8 Common error code ........................................................................................... 3-82

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-v

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3-vi

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.1 The Diagnostic Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.1

The Diagnostic Test

This chapter explains how to use the Diagnostic Test programs to test the functions of the
computer’s hardware modules. The Diagnostics Programs are stored on some Diagnostic
Disks. There are Service Program Modules (DIAGNOSTIC MENU) and the Test Program
Modules (DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU) on the Diagnostic Disk.
The Hardware Initial information Setting Tool consists of some programs which write the
hardware information or displays the current information of the computer. It is also included
in one of Diagnostic Disks.
The heatrun test is automatic test program which executes the some tests successively.
NOTE: Before starting the diagnostics, be sure to follow these steps:
1. Check all cables are connected firmly.
2. Exit any application and close Windows.
3. Check if [All Devices] is selected in the “Device Config.” in SETUP menu.

3.1.1 Diagnostics menu
The DIAGNOSTIC MENU consists of the following functions.

DIAGNOSTIC TEST
ONLY ONE TEST
HEAD CLEANING
LOG UTILITIES
RUNNING TEST
FDD UTILITIES
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
POWER OFF

The DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU contains the following functional tests:

SYSTEM TEST
MEMORY TEST
KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY TEST
FLOPPY DISK TEST
PRINTER TEST
ASYNC TEST
HARD DISK TEST
REAL TIMER TEST

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-1

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.1 The Diagnostic Test

NDP TEST
EXPANSION TEST
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
Other tests are:
Wireless LAN TEST (Wireless LAN TEST disk)
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST (LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST
disk)
Sound TEST (Sound TEST disk)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the Diagnostic test programs.
The Diagnostic Disks (T&D for maintenance for Main,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394, wireless LAN and Sound)
A formatted working disk (Floppy disk test)
USB FDD (for all tests)
A USB test module (USB test )
A USB cable (USB test)
An external CRT monitor (Expansion test)
A CD test media TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK or ABEX TEST CD-ROM
(Sound test)
A DVD test media (DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1) (Sound test)
A music CD (Sound test)
A store-bought CD-RW media (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)
A microphone (Sound test)
Headphones (Sound test)
A cleaning kit to clean the floppy disk drive heads (Head Cleaning)
An exclusive modem test jig (Nitto Electric Manufacture Co.,Ltd-made QE2000P01)
(Modem test)
A module cable and RJ11 connector checker (Modem test)
A LAN wraparound connector (LAN test)
PC card wraparound connector (Expansion test)
A display with monitor ID function (Expansion test)
RS232C wraparound connector (Async test)
A PC for wraparound test (Wireless LAN test/Bluetooth test/IEEE1394 test)

3-2

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.1 The Diagnostic Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.1.2 H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool
The H/W initial information setting tool consists of the following programs.

Initial configuration
DMI information save
DMI information recovery
System configuration display
E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)

You will need the following equipment to perform some of the programs.
The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
3.1.3 Heatrun test program
The heatrun test starts automatically after the selection.
You will need the following equipment to perform this program.
The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-3

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.2

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

Executing the Diagnostic Test

To start the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM, follow these steps:
1. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the USB floppy disk drive.
2. Turn on the computer while pressing U key. The following menu appears.
TOSHIBA Diagnostics Startup Menu
--------------------------------------------------------(M) Main
(I) Initial config set
(H) Heatrun
Enter a choice: M

To start the Diagnostics menu (T&D), press M or m and Enter.
To start the H/W initial information setting tool, press I or i and Enter.
To start the Heatrun test, press H or h and Enter.
NOTE: When replacing the system board, it is necessary to execute the followings:
1. Before replacing, save the DMI information by executing subtest 03 DMI
information save in 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration.
2. Before replacing, apply the DMI information by executing subtest 04 DMI
information recovery and subtest 08 System configuration in 3.3 Setting of the
hardware configuration.

3-4

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.2.1 Diagnostics menu (T&D)
To execute this program, press M or m in the startup menu, press Enter. The following
menu appears.
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTICS MENU :
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

–
–

DIAGNOSTIC TEST
ONLY ONE TEST
HEAD CLEANING
LOG UTILITIES
RUNNING TEST
FDD UTILITIES
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
POWER OFF

NOTE: To exit the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press the Esc key. If a test program is
in progress, press Ctrl + Break to exit the test program. If a test program is in
progress, press Ctrl + C to stop the test program.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-5

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

Set the highlight bar to 1, and press Enter. The following DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
will appear:
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU :
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
88
99

–
-

SYSTEM TEST
MEMORY TEST
KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY TEST
FLOPPY DISK TEST
PRINTER TEST
ASYNC TEST
HARD DISK TEST
REAL TIMER TEST
NDP TEST
EXPANSION TEST
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
ERROR RETRY COUNT SET [FDD & HDD]
EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU

Functions 1 through 12 are the Diagnostic Tests. Function 88 sets the floppy disk
drive and hard disk drive error retry count (0-255).
To exit the submenu of the Diagnostic Test and returns to the Diagnostics Menu, set
the highlight bar to function 99 and press Enter.

3-6

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Select the option you want to execute and press Enter. When you select 1- SYSTEM
TEST, the following message will appear:
SYSTEM TEST NAME

SUB-TEST
PASS COUNT
WRITE DATA
ADDRESS

:
:
:
:

XXXXXX

xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop

XX
XXXXX
ERROR COUNT
XX
READ DATA
XXXXXX STATUS

: XXXXX
: XX
: XXX

SUB-TEST MENU :
01
04
05
06
07
99

–
–
-

ROM checksum
Fan ON/OFF
Geyserville
Quick charge
DMI read
Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU

NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
Select the desired subtest number from the subtest menu and press Enter. The following
message will appear:
TEST LOOP : YES (or NO)
ERROR STOP : YES (or NO)

Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option.
Selecting YES of TEST LOOP increases the pass counter by one, each time the test cycle
ends and restarts the test cycle.
Selecting NO returns the process to the subtest menu after the test is complete.
Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to “ERROR STOP”.
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-7

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test

Selecting YES of ERROR STOP stops the test program when an error is found and displays
the operation guide on the right side of the display screen as shown below:
ERROR STATUS NAME

[[ HALT OPERATION ]]
1: Test end
2: Continue
3: Retry

These three selections have the following functions respectively:
1. Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.
2. Continues the test.
3. Restarts the test from the error.
Selecting NO keeps the test running even if an error is found. When an error occurred, the
error status is displayed and one error is added to the error counter.
Table 3-1 in section 3.5 describes the function of each test on the subtest. Table 3-2 in
section 3.18 describes the error codes and error status names for each error.
Details of tests in DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU are described on and after section 3.6. As for
other service programs, refer to section 3.20 to 3.25
3.2.2 H/W initial information setting tool
After selecting this test, the following menu appears in the display.
###################################################################
######
H/W initial information setting tool
VX.XX
########
###################################################################
*
1 ………………………… Initial configuration
*
*
3 ………………………… DMI information save
*
*
4 ………………………… DMI information recovery
*
*
8 ………………………… System configuration display
*
*
9 ………………………… E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
*
*******************************************************************
... Press test number [1,3,4,8,9] ?

For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.3.
3.2.3 Heatrun test program
After selecting this test, the heatrun test starts executing the same subtest as 3.23 RUNNING
TEST.
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.4.

3-8

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration

3.3

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Setting of the hardware configuration

To execute this program, press I or i in the startup menu, press Enter and follow the
directions on the screen. The H/W initial information setting tool consists of four subtests.
Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01

Initial configuration
This subtest executes the following items and shows their contents in the
display. When an item ends normally, the program proceeds automatically to
the next one. When an error is found, the program stops and waits for key
input. (After solving the problem, the program executes the item again.)
Setting of the CPU set table
Setting of the micro code
Setting of the EHSS
Inputting and writing of DMI information
When the DMI information is displayed, the following messages
appear in order. Input each information. (If you do not replace the
PCB, the DMI information should not be changed.)
1. “Enter Model Name ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
model name and press Enter. (e.g. DynaBook)
2. “Enter Version Number ?” is displayed. Input the
computer’s version number and press Enter.
(e.g. PC18070C313S)
3. “Enter Serial Number ?” is displayed. Input the
computer’s serial number and press Enter. (e.g. 12345678)
4. “Enter Model Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
sales model number and press Enter. (e.g. PP200-AAAAA)
5. “Enter Bundle Number ?” is displayed. Input the
computer’s PCN/Bundle number and press Enter.
(e.g. PMSREQ3Q34H/S0123456789)
6. “Write data OK (Y/N) ?” is displayed. To write the DMI
information to the Flash ROM, press Y, and then Enter.
7. “Create DMIINFO TXT (Y/N) ?” is displayed. Press Y,
then the DMI information (text data) is written to the Floppy disk,
etc.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-9

3 Tests and Diagnostics
•
•
•

3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration

Setting of the HWSC
Setting of the UUID
Display of the DMI information (including UUID)

After completion of the above settings, H/W configuration & DMI
information are appeared in order. Check the contents and press Enter.
Subtest 03

DMI information save
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest saves all the DMI data in a floppy disk.

Subtest 04

DMI information recovery
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest writes all the DMI data in the floppy disk into the new PCB.

NOTE: Since the data of UUID is updated every time when this subtest, DMI information
recovery, is done, the saved UUID data is not written.
Subtest 08

System configuration display
This subtest displays the information of the system configuration.
When the following message appears, confirm the contents and press Enter.
Press [Enter] key

For more details on the system configuration information, refer to “3.25
System configuration”.
Subtest 09

E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
It checks whether the MAC address, GUID of IEEE1394 and DMI
information are written.

3-10

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.4 Heatrun Test

3.4

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Heatrun Test

To execute this program, press H or h in the startup menu, press Enter.
After selecting this test, the same subtests as 3.23 Running Test are executed successively.
For more details on the procedure and test content, refer to Running Test.
When the heatrun test ends normally, following message appears in the display.
************************************************
HEATRUN NORMAL END
************************************************
Press any key to continue...
Press any key and return to the startup menu.
NOTE: The test result (Errorlog.txt) is stored in the floppy disk. The result is displayed in
the same format as Log Utilities. For more details of the format, refer to 3.22
Log Utilities.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-11

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.5

3.5 Subtest Names

Subtest Names

Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU.
Table 3-1 Subtest names (1/2)
No.

3-12

Test Name

Subtest No.

Subtest Name

SYSTEM

01
02
03
04
05

MEMORY

01
02
03
04
05

ROM checksum
Fan ON/OFF
Geyserville
Quick charge
DMI read
Conventional memory
Protected Mode
Protected Mode (cache off)
Cache memory (on/off)
Stress

KEYBOARD

Pressed key code display

DISPLAY

01
02
03
04
05
06
07

VRAM read/write for VGA
Gradation for VGA
Gradation for LCD
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
All dot on/off for LCD
“H” pattern display
LCD Brightness

FLOPPY DISK

01
02
03
04
05

Sequential read
Sequential read/write
Random address/data
Write specified address
Read specified address

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.5 Subtest Names

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Table 3-1 Subtest names (2/2)
No.
6

Test Name
PRINTER
[Not supported]

Subtest No.

Subtest Name

01
02
03

Ripple pattern
Function
Wraparound

ASYNC
[Not supported]

01
02
03

FIR/SIR Point to point (send)
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)
Wraparound (board)

HARD DISK

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

Sequential read
Address uniqueness
Random address/data
Cross talk & peak shift
Partial Read
Write specified address
Read specified address
Sequential write
W-R-C specified address

REAL TIMER

01
02
03

Real time
Backup memory
Real time carry

NDP

EXPANSION

01
02

PCMCIA wraparound [Not supported]
RGB monitor ID

CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM

01
02
03
04

Sequential read
Read specified address
Random address/data
RW 1point W/R/C

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-13

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.6

3.6 System Test

System Test

To execute the System Test, select 1 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01

ROM checksum
This subtest executes a checksum test of the BIOS ROM (range: F0000h to
FFFFFh, 64KB) on the System Board.

Subtest 02

Fan ON/OFF
The following message will appear.
Fan number select (1;FAN#1(CPU), 2;FAN#2(GPU)*1, 0; FAN#1)?

To check the CPU fan, press 1 and Enter.
To check the GPU fan, press 2 and Enter.
To check both CPU fan and GPU fan, press 0 and Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution 0000RPM start

Make sure the fan does not rotate, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution Low speed Start

Make sure the fan rotates at low speed, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution High speed Start

Make sure the fan rotates at high speed, then press Enter.
After a while, the fan rotating will stop.
*1 2;FAN#2(GPU)is not supported in this model.
Subtest 03

Geyserville
If the CPU supports Gerserville (SpeedStep), this subtest checks that the CPU
operating clock speed can be changed.

3-14

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.6 System Test

Subtest 04

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Quick charge
This subtest checks the status for the quick charge.

Subtest 05

DMI read
This subtest displays the information in the Flash-ROM in the following
format.
*** DMI Data Display Ver X.XX ***
Model Name
Version Number
Serial Number
Model Number
UUID Number

:
:
:
:
:

XXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXX-XXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Press [Enter] to EXIT

To exit this subtest and return to the SYSTEM test menu, press Enter.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-15

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.7

3.7 Memory Test

Memory Test

To execute the Memory Test, select 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01

Conventional memory
This subtest writes a constant data to conventional memory (0 to 640 KB),
then reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.

Subtest 02

Protected Mode

NOTE: The CONFIG.SYS file must be configured without expanded memory manager
programs such as EMM386.EXE, EMM386.SYS or QEMM386.SYS. Also, the
HIMEM.SYS must be deleted from the CONFIG.SYS file.
This subtest writes constant data and address data (from 1MB to maximum
MB), and reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 03

Protected Mode (cache off)
This subtest executes the same way as the subtest 02 with the cache off.

Subtest 04

Cache memory (on/off)
To test the cache memory, a pass-through write-read comparison of ‘5Ah’
data is run repeatedly to the test area (‘7000’: ‘Program’ size to ‘7000’:
‘7FFF’ (32 KB)) to check the hit-miss ratio (on/off status) for CPU cache
memory. One test takes 3 seconds.
Number of misses < Number of hits → OK
Number of misses ≥ Number of hits → Fail

Subtest 05

Stress
Write/Read buffer (1 size = B30h) is prepared in the conventional memory.
The data is made in the Write Buffer, the data in Write Buffer is written in the
area of address of 1MB or after. The data is red in the Read Buffer and data is
compared in area up to the maximum size.
Data: FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, 00h, 00h, 00h,
FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, FFh, 00h, 00h, FFh, 00h,
00h, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, 00h, 00h, AAh

3-16

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.8 Keyboard Test

3.8

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Keyboard Test

To execute the Keyboard Test, select 3 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01

Pressed key code display
When a key is pressed, the scan code, character code, and key top name are
displayed on the screen in the format shown below. The Ins Lock, Caps
Lock, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Alt, Ctrl, Left Shift and Right Shift
keys are displayed in reverse screen mode when pressed. The scan codes,
character codes, and key top names are shown in Appendix E.
KEYBOARD TEST

IN PROGRESS

Scan code

Character code

Keytop

302000

Ins Lock

Caps Lock

Num Lock

Scroll Lock

Alt

Ctrl

Left Shift

Right Shift

PRESS [Enter] KEY

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-17

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.9

3.9 Display Test

Display Test

To execute the Display Test, select 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01

VRAM read/write for VGA
This subtest writes the constant data (AAh and 55h) to the video RAM. The
data is read and compared to the original data.

Subtest 02

Gradation for VGA
This subtest displays four colors: red, green, blue and white from left to right
across the screen from black to maximum brightness. The display below
appears on the screen, when this subtest is executed.

To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
Subtest 03

Gradation for LCD
This subtest displays bands of gradations for mixed colors, then for red, green,
and blue. Next, it displays eight solid colors full screen: red, semi-red, green,
semi-green, blue, semi-blue, white and semi-white. Each color displays for
three seconds.

3-18

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.9 Display Test

Subtest 04

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Gradation & Mode test for VGA
This subtest displays gradations for following modes. To change the mode,
press Enter.
[Mode
[Mode
[Mode
[Mode
[Mode
[Mode
[Mode
[Mode
[Mode

12]
13]
3]
111
112
114
115
117
118

640*480
640*480
800*600
800*600
1024*768
1024*768

64K]
16M]
64K]
16M]
64K]
16M]

The display below appears on the screen when this subtest is executed.

(Display example: Mode 12)
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter after
displaying the Mode 118.
Subtest 05

All dot on/off for LCD
This subtest displays an all-white screen then an all-black screen. The display
changes automatically every three seconds and the screen returns to the
DISPLAY TEST menu.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-19

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 06

3.9 Display Test

“H” pattern display
This subtest displays a full screen of “H” patterns.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
NOTE: The last row may not be completely filled. This condition does not indicate on
error.
Subtest 07

LCD Brightness
The LCD brightness changes in the following order:
Super-Bright → Bright → Semi-Bright → Bright → Super-Bright
After displaying with Super-Bright of LCD brightness, the screen returns to
the DISPLAY TEST menu.

3-20

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.10 Floppy Disk Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.10 Floppy Disk Test
CAUTION: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove
the Diagnostics Disk and insert the work disk into the FDD because the
contents of the floppy disk will be erased.
To execute the Floppy Disk Test, select 5 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
1. The following message will appear. Select the media mode and start track to be tested
and press Enter.
Test start track

(Enter:0/dd:00-79) ?

2. The Floppy Disk test contains five subtests that test the FDD.
The floppy disk test menu will appear after you select FDD test parameters.
FLOPPY DISK

SUB-TEST
PASS COUNT
WRITE DATA
ADDRESS

XXXXXXX

:
:
:
:

XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop

XX
XXXXX
ERROR COUNT
XX
READ DATA
XXXXXX STATUS

: XXXXX
: XX
: XXX

SUB-TEST MENU :
01
02
03
04
05
99

Sequential read
Sequential read/write
Random address/data
Write specified address
Read specified address
Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-21

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.10 Floppy Disk Test

Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following
message will appear during the floppy disk test.
FLOPPY DISK

SUB-TEST
PASS COUNT
WRITE DATA
ADDRESS

IN PROGRESS

:
:
:
:

XXXXXXX

xxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop

XX
XXXXX
ERROR COUNT
XX
READ DATA
XXXXXX STATUS

: XXXXX
: XX
: XXX

When the subtest 04 or 05 is selected, the following messages will appear on the screen.
Select the test data (subtest 04 only), track number and head number you want to test.
Test data
Track No.
Head No.

Subtest 01

?? (subtest 04 only)
??
?

Sequential read
This subtest performs a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that continuously
reads all the tracks (track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk.

Subtest 02

Sequential read/write
This subtest continuously writes data pattern B5ADADh to all the tracks
(track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared
to the original data.

Subtest 03

Random address/data
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks (track: 0 to
39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the
original data.

Subtest 04

Write specified address
This subtest writes the data specified by an operator to a specified track, head
and address.

Subtest 05

Read specified address
This subtest reads data from a track, head and address specified by an
operator.

3-22

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.11 Printer Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.11 Printer Test
NOTE: Printer Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Printer Test, select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
NOTE: An IBM compatible printer must be connected to the system to execute this test.
Also, printer port wraparound connector must be connected.
The following message will appear, after selecting the subtest 01 to 03 of the printer test:
channel#1 = XXXXh
channel#2 = XXXXh
channel#3 = XXXXh
Select the channel number (1-3) ?

The printer I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. The computer supports
three printer channels. Select the printer channel number, and press Enter to execute the
selected subtest.
Subtest 01

Ripple pattern
This subtest prints characters for codes 20h through 7Eh line-by-line while
shifting one character to the left at the beginning of each new line.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-23

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 02

3.11 Printer Test

Function
This subtest is for IBM compatible printers, and tests the following functions:
Normal print
Double-width print
Compressed print
Emphasized print
Double-strike print
All characters print
This subtest prints the various print types shown below:

Subtest 03

Wraparound

NOTE: To execute this subtest, a printer wraparound connector must be connected to the
computer’s printer port.
This subtest checks the output and bi-directional modes of the data control
and status lines through the parallel port wraparound connector
(34M741986G01). (Both output and bi-directional modes are tested.)

3-24

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.12 Async Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.12 Async Test
NOTE: Async Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Async Test, select 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions displayed on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want
to execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01 and 02 require the following data format:
Method
Speed
Data
Data pattern
Subtest 01

: Asynchronous
: 38400BPS
: 8 bits and one parity bit (EVEN)
: 20h to 7Eh

FIR/SIR point to point (send)

NOTE: To execute subtests 01 and 02, each computer must have access to the other
computer’s infrared port.
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the
sent data and compares it to the original data through the FIR/SIR port.
Subtest 02

FIR/SIR point to point (receive)
This subtest is used with subtest 01 described above. This subtest receives the
data from the send side, then sends the received data through the FIR/SIR
port.

Subtest 03

Wraparound (board)

NOTE: To execute this subtest, a RS-232C wraparound connector must be connected to
the RS-232C port.
This subtest checks the data send/receive function through the wraparound
connector.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-25

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.13 Hard Disk Test

3.13 Hard Disk Test
To execute the Hard Disk Test, select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter,
and follow the directions on the screen.
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when subtest 02, 03, 04, 06, 08
or 09 is executed. Before running the test, the customer should transfer the
contents of the hard disk to floppy disk or another hard disk. If the customer
has not or can not perform the back-up, create back-up disks as described
below.
Check to see if the Microsoft Create System Disks Tools (MSCSD.EXE) still
exists in the System Tools Folder. (This tool can be used only once.) If it
exists, use it to back up the pre-installed software, then use the Backup
utility in the System Tools folder to back up the entire disk, including the
user’s files.
Refer to the operating system instructions.
1. The following message appears for the error dump operation when a data compare
error is detected. Select 1 or 2.
Data compare error dump (1:no, 2:yes)

2. The following message appears for whether or not the HDC status is displayed on the
screen. The HDC status is described in section 3.19. Select 1 or 2.
Detail status display

3-26

[CONFIDENTIAL]

(1:no, 2:yes)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.13 Hard Disk Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3. The Hard Disk Test message will appear after you respond to the Detail Status
prompt. Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The
following message will appear during each subtest.
HARD DISK TEST XXXXXXX

SUB TEST
PASS COUNT
WRITE DATA
ADDRESS

:
:
:
:

XX
XXXXX
XX
XXXXXX

XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
ERROR COUNT
READ DATA
STATUS

: XXXXX
: XX
: XXX

The first three digits of the ADDRESS indicate which cylinder is being tested, the
fourth digit indicates the head number and the last two digits indicate the sector
number.
The first digit of the STATUS indicates the drive being tested and the last two digits
indicate the error status code as explained in the table 3-2 of the section 3.18.
Subtest 01

Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of all the tracks on the HDD starting at
track 0. When all the tracks on the HDD have been read, the test starts at the
maximum track and reads the tracks on the HDD sequentially back to track 0.

Subtest 02

Address uniqueness
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-bytrack. The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the
original data. There are three ways the HDD can be read:
1. Forward sequential
2. Reverse sequential
3. Random

Subtest 03

Random address/data
This subtest writes random data in a random length to random addresses. This
data is then read and compared to the original data.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-27

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 04

3.13 Hard Disk Test

Cross talk & peak shift
This subtest writes eight types of worst pattern data (listed below) to a
cylinder and then reads the data while moving from cylinder to cylinder.
(Tests the data interference in the neighbor track.)

Subtest 05

Worst pattern data

Cylinder

‘B5ADAD’

0 cylinder

‘4A5252’

1 cylinder

‘EB6DB6’

2 cylinder

‘149749’

3 cylinder

’63B63B’

4 cylinder

‘9C49C4’

5 cylinder

‘2DB6DB’

6 cylinder

‘D24974’

7 cylinder

Partial Read
This subtest reads 1GB data which is in minimum, middle and maximum
address of the HDD area.

Subtest 06

Write specified address
This subtest writes specified data to a specified cylinder and head on the
HDD.

Subtest 07

Read specified address
This subtest reads data, which has been written to a specified cylinder and
head on the HDD.

Subtest 08

Sequential write
This subtest writes specified 2-byte data to all of the cylinders on the HDD.

Subtest 09

W-R-C specified address
This subtest writes data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD, then
reads the data and compares it to the original data.

3-28

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.14 Real Timer Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.14 Real Timer Test
To execute the Real Timer Test, select 9 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01

Real time
A new date and time can be input during this subtest. To execute the real time
subtest, follow these steps:
1. Select subtest 01 and the following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new date:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST

2. If the current date is not correct, input the correct date at the “Enter new
date” prompt and press Enter.
3. The following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new time:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST

4. If the current time is not correct, input the correct time in 24-hour format.
To enter “:”, press Shift + ;. The time is updated.
To exit the test, press Enter.
Subtest 02

Backup memory
This subtest checks the following backup memories:
Writes 1-bit of “on” data (01h through 80h) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes 1-bit of “off” data (FEh through 7Fh) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes the data pattern AAh and 55h to the address 0Eh to 7Fh
Then the subtest reads and compares this data with the original data.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-29

3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 03
CAUTION:

3.14 Real Timer Test

Real time carry
When this subtest is executed, the current date and time are erased.
This subtest checks the real time clock increments, making sure the date and
time are displayed in the following format:
Current date :
Current time :

12-31-1999
23:59:58

The real time increments are automatically executed and the following is
displayed:
Current date :
Current time :

01-01-2000
00:00:00

PRESS [Enter] KEY TO EXIT TEST

To exit the test, press Enter.

3-30

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.15 NDP Test

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.15 NDP Test
To execute the NDP test, select 10 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01

NDP
This test checks the following functions of NDP:
Control word
Status word
Bus
Addition
Multiplication

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-31

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.16 Expansion Test

3.16 Expansion Test
To execute the expansion test, select 11 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01

PCMCIA wraparound

CAUTION: PCMCIA wraparound test is not supported for this model.
NOTE: To execute this subtest, the PC card wraparound connector is required.
This subtest checks the following signal line of the PC card slot:
Address line
REG#, CE#1, CE#2 line
Data line
Speaker line
Wait line
BSY#, BVD1 line
This subtest is executed in the following order:
Sub#

Address

Good

Bad

Contents

00001
00001

nn
nn

xx
xx

Address line
REG#, CE#1, CE#2
nn=A0, 90, 80, 00

00002

Data line
ww=write data, rr=read
data

00003

––

Speaker line

00004

40,80

Wait line (40 display changes according to the following illustration. If a
touch pad switch is pressed, the displays appear on the right side
one by one. The parameters appear above the (1) or (2)
corresponding to the pressed touch pad switch highlights. To end this subtest,
press two touch pad switches at the same time.

3-42

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.20 ONLY ONE TEST

Subtest 03

3 Tests and Diagnostics

GP Button
This subtest checks the operation of the front operation panel button.
Press the Internet button after the following message appears.
Press [ Internet ] button

If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ CD/DVD ] button

If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Play/pause ] button

If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Stop ] button

If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Rewind ] button

If the correct button is pressed, the following message appears.
Press [ Fforward ] button

If the correct button is pressed, the display returns to the ONLY ONE TEST
menu.
Subtest 04

Wireless communication switch
This subtest checks if the Wireless communication switch works properly.
If the test is started with the switch ON, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch is set to a start position (OFF)
Slide the switch to OFF position. Then, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch ON !!

Slide the switch to ON position. Then, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch OFF !!

After Sliding the switch to OFF position, return to the ONLY ONE TEST
menu automatically.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-43

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 05

3.20 ONLY ONE TEST

USB

NOTE: When executing this subtest, USB test module and USB cable must be connected.
This subtest checks if USB port works properly.
The following menu appears in the display.
################################################################
########
ONLY ONE TEST Menu (XXXXXXXXX)
######
################################################################
*
*
*
0 ............ Port 0 (Left side)
*
*
1 ............ Port 1 (Right side Upper)
*
*
9 ............ EXIT 2 (Right side Lower)
*
*
*
****************************************************************
.... Press test number[0-1, 9] ?

Connect the USB test module and USB cable to the computer.
Input the port test number and press Enter.
OK message appears in the display if the test ends without fail.
NG message appears in the display if an error is found during the test.
Confirm the connection of cable, and then execute the test again.
Press 9 and Enter to return to ONLY ONE TEST menu.
Subtest 06

LED
This subtest checks if each LED lights properly.
The following message appears in the display in order. Follow the instructions
in the display to execute the test.
[HDD Access LED test]

Press any key and following message appears in the display.
[Caps/Num/Overlay BT/W-LAN LED test]
(1)

Press [Caps Lock ] key ! ...Caps

(on/off)

(2)

Press [Fn + F10

] key ! ...Arrow

(on/off)

(3)

Press [Fn + F11

] key ! ...Num

(on/off)

(4)

Slide [BT/W-LAN switch L&R]!

(on/off)

Confirm corresponding LED lights properly.
Press Enter and following message appears in the display.
Check [DC-IN]&[Power]&[Main Battery]LED= Green

Check if the color of the message changes blue to green alternately.

3-44

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.20 ONLY ONE TEST

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Press Enter and return to the ONLY ONE TEST menu.
Subtest 0A

Acceleration sensor
This subtest detects and corrects the each axis (X, Y, Z).

NOTE: Make sure that this subtest is executed on the following condition:
1. Flat desk with vertical plane to get the stability of machine.
2. The vertical wall or plane is necessary.
3. Prevent the machine from shake or shock.

Set the machine
against the vertical plane
with the Front upward

Vertical plane

Flat desk

The figure below shows the name and position of each side.
Top
(heaven surface)
Back

Left side

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Right side

Front

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-45

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.20 ONLY ONE TEST

When this subtest is selected, the following message appears in the display.
The heaven surface establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key

NOTE: Be sure to execute the test with the display panel opened.
Set the machine on the flat desk. Then press Enter to detect the data on this
setting of machine. The following message appears in the display.
The back establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key

Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the back of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The right establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key

Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the right side
of machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The front establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key

Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the front of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The left establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key

Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the left side of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine.
When there is no defective during the all checks above, the following message
appears in the display. Then press Enter and return to the Only One Test
menu.
** Setting OK! **
Press [Enter] key

When any trouble in the above setting is found, the following message appears
and the test halts. Then press Enter and return to the Only One Test menu.
** Setting ERROR! **
Press [Enter] key

3-46

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.21 Head Cleaning

3.21

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Head Cleaning

3.21.1 Function Description
This function cleans the heads in the FDD by executing a series of head load/seek and read
operations. A cleaning kit is necessary to perform this program.
3.21.2 Operations
1. Selecting test 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following messages:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK HEAD CLEANING : VX.XX
Mount cleaning disk(s) on drive(s).
Press any key when ready.

2. Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, then insert the cleaning disk and press
Enter.
3. When the “cleaning start” message appears, the FDD head cleaning has begun.
4. The display automatically returns to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU when the program is
completed.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-47

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.22

3.22 Log Utilities

Log Utilities

3.22.1 Function Description
This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the results
in RAM. This function can store data on a floppy disk, or output the data to a printer or the
display.
The error information is displayed in the following order:
1. Error count (CNT)
2. Test name, Subtest number (TS-No)
3. Pass count (PASS)
4. Error status (STS)
5. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)
6. Write data (WD)
7. Read data (RD)
8. HDC status (HSTS)
9. Error status name (ERROR STATUS NAME)
If the power switch is turned off, the error information will be lost.

3-48

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.22 Log Utilities

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.22.2 Operations
1. Select 5 and press Enter in the DIAGNOSTIC MENU, the error information is
displayed in the following format:
XXXXX ERRORS
CNT TS-NO PASS STS

ADDR

WD RD HSTS [ERROR STATUS NAME]

001
001

00001
00001

00 00 0000 FDD-WRITE PROTECTED
00 00 0000 FDD-TIME OUT ERROR

FDD 02 0000 103
FDD 01 0000 180

Address
Error status
Pass count
Subtest number

HDC status
Read data
Write data

Error status name

Test name
Error count
[[1:Next,2:Prev,3:Exit,4:Clear,5:Print,6:FD Log Read,7:FD Log Write]]

2. The error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated by the following
number keys:
The 1 key scrolls the display to the next page.
The 2 key scrolls the display to the previous page.
The 3 key returns to the Diagnostic Menu.
The 4 key erases all error log information in RAM.
The 5 key outputs the error log information to a printer.
The 6 key reads the log information from a floppy disk.
The 7 key writes the log information to a floppy disk.
3. In the case of “error retry OK”, a capital “R” will be placed at the beginning of the
error status. However, it is not added to the error count.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-49

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.23

3.23 Running Test

Running Test

3.23.1 Function Description
This function automatically executes the following tests in sequence:
1. System test (subtest 01)
2. Memory test (subtests 01, 02, 06)
3. Display test (subtest 01)
4. Real timer test (subtest 02)
5. HDD test (subtest 01)
The system automatically detects the number of floppy disk drives connected to the computer
for the FDD test.
3.23.2 Operations
NOTE: After booting up the Running test, pull out the test program and insert a floppy
disk which has been formatted by FORMAT command of DOS.
1. Pull out the test program and insert a floppy disk which has been formatted by
FORMAT command of DOS.
2. Select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter, the following messages
for selectable tests will appear in the display in order.
FDD write/read test (Y/N) ?
Printer wrap around test (Y/N) ?
Serial wrap around test (Y/N) ?
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test (Y/N) ?

3. To execute the test, press Y and Enter. To cancel the test, press N and Enter. If you
select the selectable tests, follow the instruction message in the display.
4. After selecting the selectable tests, the running test starts automatically. To terminate
the program, press Ctrl + Break.

3-50

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3.24

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3.24.1 Function Description
This function formats the FDD, copies the floppy disk and displays the dump list for both the
FDD and HDD.
1. FORMAT
NOTE: This program is only for testing a floppy disk drive. It is different from the
Toshiba MS-DOS FORMAT command.
This program can format a floppy disk in the following formats:
(a) 2DD: Double-sided, double-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode,
512 bytes, 9 sectors/track.
(b) 2HD: Double-sided, high-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512
bytes, 18 sectors/track.
2. COPY
This program copies data from a source floppy disk to a target floppy disk.
3. DUMP
This program displays the contents of the floppy disk and the designated sectors of
the hard disk on the display.
4. HDD ID READ
This program reads the hard disk ID and displays hard disk information.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-51

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3.24.2 Operations
1. Selecting 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following message.
[ FDD UTILITIES ]
1
2
3
4
9

–
-

FORMAT
COPY
DUMP
HDD-ID READ
EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU

2. FORMAT program
(a) Selecting FORMAT displays the following message.
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK FORMAT : VX.XX
Drive number select (1:A, 2:B) ?

(b) Select a drive number to display the following message.
Type select (0:2DD, 3:2HD) ?

(c) Select a media/drive type number and press Enter. A message similar to the
one below will be displayed.
Warning : Disk data will be destroyed.
Insert work disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.

(d) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the work disk and press
any key.
The following message will be displayed when the FDD format is executed.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD
= X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Format start
[[track, head = XXX X]]

After the floppy disk is formatted, the following message will appear.
Format complete
Another format (1:Yes/2:No) ?

(e) Typing 1 displays the message from step (c) above. Typing 2 returns the test
to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

3-52

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3. COPY program
(a) When COPY is selected, the following message appears.
FLOPPY DISK FORMAT & COPY : VX.XX
Type select (0:2DD,3:2HD) ?

(b) Selecting a media/drive type number will display a message similar to the one
below.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.

(c) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the source disk and press
any key. The following message will appear, indicating the program has
started.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR

= XXX
= X
= XX

Copy start
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]

(d) The following message will appear.
Insert target disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.

(e) Remove the source disk from the FDD, then insert a formatted work disk and
press any key. The following message will appear and start copying to the
target disk.
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]

(f) When the amount of data is too large to be copied in one operation, the
message from step (b) is displayed again. After the floppy disk has been
copied, the following message will appear.
Copy complete
Another copy (1:Yes/2:No) ?

(g) To copy another disk, type 1 and the message from step (a) is displayed again.
Entering 2 returns the test program to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-53

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

4. DUMP program
(a) When DUMP is selected, the following message appears.
DIAGNOSTICS-HARD DISK & FLOPPY DISK DUMP : VX.XX
Drive type select (1:FDD, 2:HDD) ?

(b) Select a drive type. If 2:HDD is selected, the display will go to step (h). If
1:FDD is selected, the following message will appear.
Select drive number

(1:A, 2:B) ?

(d) If 3:2HD is selected, the following message will appear. Select a media mode.
2HD media mode (1:1.20MB, 2:1.44MB, 3:1.23MB)?

(e) The following message will appear.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.

(f) Insert a source disk and press any key and the following message will appear.
—— Max.
[Track ]
[Head ]
[Sector]

address ——
= XXXX
= XX
= XX

Track number ????

(g) Set the track number, head number and sector number you want to dump. The
system will access the disk and dump a list. Then the message shown in (k)
will appear.
(h) The following message will appear when selecting 2:HDD in (a).
Select drive number

(1:C, 2:D) ?

(i) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
---Max. address --[LBA ] = XXXXXXXXX
LBA number ????????

(j) Set the LBA number you want to dump. The system will access the disk and
dump a list.

3-54

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities

3 Tests and Diagnostics

(k) The following message will appear. To finish the dump, select 3.
Press number key (1:up,2:down,3:end) ?

(l) The following message will appear. Selecting 2 returns to the FDD
UTILITIES MENU.
Another dump (1:Yes,2:No) ?

5. HDD ID READ program
Selecting HDD ID displays the following HDD ID configuration.
[HDD ID Read (VX.XX)] [Drive #1]
Model No.

= XXXXXXX

Press Enter to return to the FDD UTILITIES MENU.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-55

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.25 System Configuration

3.25 System Configuration
3.25.1 Function Description
NOTE: To display the system configuration, the write protect tab should be OFF
position. If the tab is ON position, move the tab to OFF position and restart the
test. Otherwise the correct information cannot be acquired.
The System Configuration program contains the following configuration information for the
computer:
1. Processor Type [Code/L2 cache]
2. Chip set [VRAM]
3. BIOS ROM version [1st ID, 2nd ID]
4. Boot ROM version
5. EC total version
6. PS Microprocessor version
7. Micro code revision [Processor number]
8. Total Memory Size [Conventional memory]
9. Battery code
10. HWSC
11. FSB [Voltage]
12. The number of printer ports
13. The number of ASYNC ports
14. Math co-processors
15. Floppy Disk Drive [Track/Head/Sector]
16. Hard Disk Drive [Sector/Drive size/Manufacture code]
17. T&D total version
18. Date/Time

3-56

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.25 System Configuration

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.25.2 Operations
Select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. Then, the following system
configuration appears in the display.
System Configuration Display : Ver X.XX [Machine Name ???]
*
*
*
*
*
*

Processor Type
Chip set
BIOS ROM Version
BOOT ROM Version
EC Total Version
PS Micon Version

=
=
=
=
=
=

XXXXXX-XXXXXMHz
Code = XX
L2 Cache = XXXXXKB
XXXXXX
VRAM = XXXXMB
VX.XX
1st ID = XXH, 2nd ID = XXH
VX.XX
VX.XX
VX.XX

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Micro code Revision
Total Memory Size
Battery Code
HWSC
FSB
X Printer Adapter
X ASYNC Adapter
X Math CO-Processor

=
=
=
=
=

VX.XX
(Processor=XXXh)
XXXXXXMB (Conventional Memory = XXXKB)
XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXMHz (Voltage = XEh)
LPT1 = XXXX LPT2 = XXXX LPT3 = XXXX
COM1 = XXXX COM2 = XXXX COM3 = XXXX

*
*

- X USB Floppy Disk Drive(s) Track = XX Head = XX, Sector = XX
- X Hard Disk Drive(s)
#1 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
#2 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

- T&D Total Version

Press [Enter] Key

= VX.XX
[Date = XXXX-YY-ZZ, XX:YY:ZZ]

Press Enter to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-57

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test with the
test program.
NOTE: Use another computer (with Atheros 11a/g(MB44ag)/Atheros 11a/g(MB62HL))
that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine to perform
this test.
The computer must be booted by the Responder T&D.
In this test, the following items are tested:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

SKU check of Module
MAC Address Check
Communication test of 11a mode
Communication test of 11b mode
Communication test of 11g mode
SKU & MAC Check,11a/b/g communication test

NOTE: This test take time until it completes.
To start the Wireless LAN test program, follow the steps below:
NOTE: Before starting the wireless LAN test, make sure the Wireless Communication
Switch of the computer is turned on. (The Wireless Communication LED lights
orange.)

3-58

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.26.1 Setting the responder machine
1. MB44ag is installed
1) Boot the computer by MB4x Responder media.
2) The Responder T&D is automatically started.
2. MB6x is installed
As the capacity of MB6x T&D is over the one of a FD, a RAM drive is used.
1) Boot the computer by MB6x Responder media.
2) After starting the OS, following message is displayed. input m and press Enter.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
Atheros MB4x/MB5x/MB6x Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
s : Atheros MB4x DUT mode
*
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB4x DUT media
*
*
*
*
h : Atheros MB5x DUT mode
*
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x DUT media
*
*
*
*
r : Atheros MB5x Responder mode
*
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x Responder media
*
*
*
*
m : Atheros MB6x setup mode
*
*
*
***********************************************************
Please input the ( s / h / r / m ) key and push the "Enter" key :

3) The RAM drive name which has been set at booting is displayed and command input
is requested. Input mb6x X and press Enter. The part of X is the RAM drive name.
In the following display, it is “C”.
1,440

(1K)

Installed Device=RAMDRIVE

Please input the following command. "mb6x X" > mb6x c [Enter]

4) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 1” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 1"
Press any Key to continue . . .

5) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 2” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 2"
Press any Key to continue . . .

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-59

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)

6) When the file copy is completed, the following test menu is displayed. Press r. The
Responder T&D is started.
************************************************************
*
*
*
Atheros MB6x DUT mode Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
d : DUT mode
*
*
*
*
r : Responder mode
*
*
*
************************************************************
SELECT MODE No.(d or r) :

3.26.2 Test procedure
The following procedures show how to start the computer of DUT side.
1) Boot the computer by Atheros T&D boot media.
2) After displaying the following menu, input m and press Enter.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
Atheros MB4x/MB5x/MB6x Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
s : Atheros MB4x DUT mode
*
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB4x DUT media
*
*
*
*
h : Atheros MB5x DUT mode
*
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x DUT media
*
*
*
*
r : Atheros MB5x Responder mode
*
*
*
*
Please exchange FD for MB5x Responder media
*
*
*
*
m : Atheros MB6x setup mode
*
*
*
***********************************************************
Please input the ( s / h / r / m ) key and push the "Enter" key :

3) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 1” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 1"
Press any Key to continue . . .

4) The following message is displayed. Change the FD with “MB6x setup media 2” and
press Enter. The file copy from the FD to the RAM drive is started.
Please exchange FD for "MB6x setup media 2"
Press any Key to continue . . .

3-60

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

5) When the file copy is completed, the following test menu is displayed. Press d. The
Responder T&D is started.
************************************************************
*
*
*
Atheros MB6x DUT mode Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
d : DUT mode
*
*
*
*
r : Responder mode
*
*
*
************************************************************
SELECT MODE No.(d or r) :

6) The following test menu is displayed. Select the test number.
************************************************************
*
Atheros MB6x DUT mode Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
*
*
2 : MAC Address Check
*
*
3 : Communication test of 11a mode
*
*
4 : Communication test of 11a mode(Main Antenna Only) *
*
5 : Communication test of 11b mode
*
*
6 : Communication test of 11b mode(Main Antenna Only) *
*
7 : Communication test of 11g mode
*
*
8 : Communication test of 11g mode(Main Antenna Only) *
*
9 : All the tests of module
*
*
(SKU & MAC Check,11a/b/g communication test)
*
*
A : All the tests of module(Main Antenna Only)
*
*
(SKU & MAC Check,11a/b/g communication test)
*
************************************************************
SELECT TEST No.(1-A) :

3.26.3 Contents of the test and errors
1. SKU check of Module
The SKU (destination) of the Wireless LAN card installed is displayed. Visually check it.
*********************************************
*
*
* Module : Atheros MB62HL (MoW)
*
* G-code : G360001Q210
*
*
*
*********************************************

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-61

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)

When an error (read error of EEPROM date) has detected, the following is displayed.
------------ERROR-----------file bac.txt cannot be opened

2. MAC Address Check
The MAC address of the installed Wireless LAN card is checked. If it is not incorrect
MAC address, the following is displayed.
************************************
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*
*
*
************************************

a. Case of All FF error
*****************************************
*
*
*
Mac Address Check NG
*
*
*
*
FFFFFF-FFFFFFh
*
*
*
*****************************************

b. Case of All 00 error
*****************************************
*
*
*
Mac Address Check NG
*
*
*
*
000000-000000h
*
*
*
*****************************************

3. Communication test of 11a mode
The check of connection of 11a mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.
When the test has been finished normally, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : OK !!
*
*
*
**************************************

3-62

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

When an error has detected, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !!
*
*
*
*
Please refer to log.txt
*
*
*
**************************************

4. Communication test of 11b mode
The check of connection of 11b mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.
When the test has been finished normally, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
*
11b Communication Test : OK !!
*
*
*
**************************************

When an error has detected, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
*
11b Communication Test : NG !!
*
*
*
*
Please refer to log.txt
*
*
*
**************************************

5. Communication test of 11g mode
The check of connection of 11g mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.
When the test has been finished normally, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
*
11g Communication Test : OK !!
*
*
*
**************************************

When an error has detected, the following is displayed.
**************************************
*
*
*
11g Communication Test : NG !!
*
*
*
*
Please refer to log.txt
*
*
*
**************************************

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-63

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Atheros)

6. SKU & MAC Check 11a/b/g communication test
All the test is executed in the order of SKU check of Module, MAC Address Check,
Communication test of 11a mode, Communication test of 11b mode and Communication
test of 11g mode.
The check of connection of 11g mode antenna and transmitting/receiving test are executed.

3-64

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intelmade 802.11a/b/g). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the Diagnostics disk for wireless
LAN test. Finish the tests of the Main test program by selecting 99 - EXIT TO
DIAGNOSTICS MENU in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Then in the DIAGNOSTICS
MENU, select 9 - EXIT TO MS-DOS.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the
power while pressing U.
The following menu appears in the display.
***********************************************************
*
Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection
*
*
Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
*
*
*
*
2 : MAC Address Check
*
*
*
*
3 : Antenna Check & communication test of 11b mode *
*
*
*
4 : Communication test of 11a mode
*
*
*
*
5 : Communication test of 11g mode
*
*
*
*
6 : All the tests of 11a/g Card
*
*
(SKU & MAC Check, 11a/b/g communication test)
*
*
*
***********************************************************
SELECT TEST No, (1-6):

To execute the subtest, input the subtest number and press Enter.
Subtest01

SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed.
Selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm
if the right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
Module : Module : Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG
*
*
Network Connection (Mow1)
*
*
G-code : G360001U110
*
*
TA No. : D26539
*
*
*
*************************************************************

Press any key and return to the test menu.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-65

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)

If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest02

MAC Address Check
This subtest displays the MAC address. Selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*
*
*
*************************************************************

Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, following message will appear in the
display.
*************************************************************
ERROR: MAC all F
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : NG !!
*
*
*
*************************************************************

Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.

3-66

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)

Subtest03

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Antenna check & communication test of 11b mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11b mode using the
main antenna first. If a defective is not found during the test,
transmitting/receiving test in 802.11b mode using the AUX antenna is
automatically executed.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message (which antenna is defective) is
displayed
**************************************
*
*
* Main Antenna Test : NG !!
*
*
*
**************************************
**************************************
*
*
* Aux Antenna Test : NG !!
*
*
*
**************************************

Press any key and return to the test menu.
Subtest04

Communication test of 11a mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11a mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !!
*
*
*
********************************************

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-67

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest05

3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)

Communication test of 11g mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11g mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
11g Communication Test : NG !!
*
*
*
********************************************

When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest06

All the tests of 11a/b/g Card
All the tests is executed in the order of SKU check of Module, MAC Address
Check, Communication test of 11b mode, Communication test of 11a mode
and Communication test of 11g mode.
When any error has detected, the test finishes.

3-68

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
This section describes how to perform the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test with the
test program.
Insert the test program disk for LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test in FDD and turn on
the power. The following message will appear:
Microsoft Windows XX Startup Menu
---------------------------------1.

LAN

Modem

Bluetooth

IEEE1394

Enter a choice:

Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
NOTE: It is impossible to go back to startup menu once you choose the test. Therefore,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test can not be executed successively.
3.28.1

LAN test

To execute LAN test, press 1 and Enter. The following message will appear:
####################################################################
#########
i82562 ICHx GbE (i82540) Diagnostics program
#####
####################################################################
*
*
*
1 ............ (i82562 + ICHx)
*
*
*
*
2 ............ (GbE)
*
*
*
********************************************************************
.... Press test number [1-2] ?

Press the number you want to test and press Enter.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-69

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest01

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

(i82562 + ICHx)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip.
The following message will appear:
[LAN transmit & receive test !]
COMPLETED

Repeat count =
Error count
=

00000
00000

LOOPBACK TEST
100Mbps Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
Destination Address
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
Source Address
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
** 100Base-TX Full-Duplex **
< TRANSMIT >
< RECEIVE >

NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.

3-70

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

Subtest02

3 Tests and Diagnostics

(GbE)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip. Select 2 to execute and press Enter.
The following message will appear:
Testing adaptor...hit to abort.
*
External Loopback Test...PASSED
Testing completed.
*
*
Loopback Test Complete
*
*
* 1000Base Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
*
* CE Test Complete

NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-71

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.28.2

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

Modem test

For this subtest, connect the modem PCB and RJ11 connector with a harness. Use the
dedicated “FAT-MODE inspection device (product code: QE2000P01 made by Nitto Denki
Seisakusyo)” for the tests.
To execute Modem test, press 2 and Enter. Following message will appear:
[Modem loopback test !]
ICHx MDC Test Program with Modem Sound (Line Test)
Version X.X
* Scorpio Modem Initialize

:OK

* Digital Loopback Test

:OK

* RJ11 Connector Check (LED)

:(Operator’s Check!!)

NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
RJ11 Connection Check (LED) (Operator’s Check LED) test will be executed, and the
following message will appear:
...Press Key (Y = OK , N =NG)

If the color in the LED of the connection checker is orange, press Y, otherwise, press N.

3-72

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

3.28.3

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Bluetooth test

To execute this test, press 3 and press Enter.
NOTE: Use another computer that can communicate by the Bluetooth as a reference
machine to perform this test.
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the target machine and turn on the target
machine. The following Bluetooth test menu will appear:
######################################################################
####
Bluetooth sub system test program VX.XX
####
######################################################################
*
*
*
1....BD_ADDR check
*
*
*
*
3... Communications test (DUT mode)
*
*
*
*
T....communications test (TEST mode)
*
*
*
**********************************************************************
....Press test number [1, 3, T] ?

Press 1 or 3 key to perform the corresponding subtest. To quit the Bluetooth test program,
eject the floppy disk and turn the computer off while the menu above is displayed.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-73

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest01

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

BD_ADDR check
This subtest checks the BD_ADDR functions. When the Bluetooth test menu
is displayed, press 1 to select the test and press Enter. The following message
will appear:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Initializing …

When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR. If BD_ADDR
has no problem, the following message is displayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]

PPPPPP

3-74

SSSSS

A A
A

S
A

SSSSS
S

PPPPPP

AAAAAAA

A S

[CONFIDENTIAL]

SSSSS

SSSSS
S
S

S
SSSSS

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

If the target machine has any problem, it displays Error CODE. The following
message is displayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]

FFFFFF
F
F

III

A A

FFFFFF

AAAAAAA

III

LLLLLLL

Table 3-5 Error message
Message

Contents

Invalid BD_ADDR (all 00)

0x000000000000

Invalid BD_ADDR (all FF)

0xFFFFFFFFFFFF

Invalid BD_ADDR (bit0=1)

bit40=1b

Invalid BD_ADDR (bit1=1)

bit41=1b

Invalid BD_ADDR (define in the file)

Defined BD_ADDR

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-75

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown
below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (1/2)
Error code
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1a
0x1b
0x1c
0x1d
0x1e
0x1f

Meaning
Unknown HCI Command.
No Connection.
Hardware Failure.
Page Timeout.
Authentication Failure.
Key Missing.
Memory Full.
Connection Timeout.
Max Number Of Connections.
Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
ACL Connection already exists.
Command Disallowed.
Host Rejected due to limited resources.
Host Rejected due to security reasons.
Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal device.
Host Timeout.
Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
Other End Terminated Connection: Used Ended Connection.
Other End Terminated Connection: Low Resources.
Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power Off.
Connection Terminated by Local Host.
Repeated Attempts.
Paring Not Allowed.
Unknown LMP PDU.
Unsupported Remote Feature.
SCO Offset Rejected.
SCO Interval Rejected.
SCO Air Mode Rejected.
Invalid LMP Parameters.
Unspecified Error.

See the Specification of the Bluetooth System for details.

3-76

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (2/2)
Error code
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2a
0x2b
0x2c
0x2d
0x2e
0x2f

Meaning
Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
Role Change Not Allowed.
LMP Response Timeout.
LMP Error Transaction Collision.
LMP PDU Not Allowed.
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist

See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.

Subtest03

Communication tests (DUT mode)

This subtest checks the Bluetooth communication functions. Preparing the tester machine for
the Bluetooth test program. Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the tester
machine and turn on the tester machine. The Bluetooth test menu will appear:
Press 3 to select the test and press Enter in the target machine. The following message will
appear:
When the test begins, the machine displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. The progress bar
stops when the test is completed. The following message is displayed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX

----------------------------------------------------------------------------+----------------------+
|

DUT

BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]

+----------------------+

<- Progress Bar

Ready>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

[ESC] : Stop

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-77

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

When the Bluetooth test menu is displayed, press T to select the test and press Enter in the
test machine. The following message will appear:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX

----------------------------------------------------------------------------+------------------+
|

Tester

+------------------+

[ESC]:Finish Tester

[SPACE]:Start

Is DUT ready?

Then press Space to start the Bluetooth communication test.
When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. If the connection
with the tester is completed, the progress bar stops. The following message is shown.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX

----------------------------------------------------------------------------+----------------------+
|

DUT

BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]

+----------------------+
CCCC
C

OOO
C

M PPPPPP

EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE DDDDD

MM P

P L

O M M M M P

P L

O M

O
C

C
CCCC

O
OOO

C
C

M PPPPPP

EEEEEE

EEEEEEE D

O M

M P

LLLLLLL EEEEEE

EEEEEEE DDDDD

D
D

Testing is finished
A>_

3-78

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

If the target machine has any problem, the following message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed
with the Error Code.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX

----------------------------------------------------------------------------+----------------------+
|

DUT

BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]

+----------------------+

III

N N

III

CCCC
C

OOO
C

M
O

M PPPPPP

P L

O M M M M P

N C

O M

N N C

O
C
CCCC

O
OOO

EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE

P L

N C

MM P

M PPPPPP

EEEEEE

EEEEEEE

O M

M P

LLLLLLL EEEEEE

EEEEEEE

Testing is finished

_Press any key to continue. . .

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-79

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (1/2)
Error code
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1a
0x1b
0x1c
0x1d
0x1e
0x1f

See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.

3-80

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (2/2)
Error code
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2a
0x2b
0x2c
0x2d
0x2e
0x2f

See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-81

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

Table 3-8 Common error code
Error code
0x30
0x31
0x32
0x33
0x34
0x35
0x36
0x37
0x38
0x39
0x3a
0x3b
0x3c
0x3d
0x3e
0x3f
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x45
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4a
0x4b
0x4c
0x4d
0x4e
0x4f

Meaning
BT Control Status should be “Disable”, but it is “Enable”.
BT Control Status should be “Enable”, but it is “Disable”.
Power Status should be “OFF”, but it is “ON”.
Power Status should be “ON”, but it is “OFF”.
USB I/F Status should be “Attach”, but it is “Detach”.
USB I/F Status should be “Detach”, but it is “Attach”.
Wake-up Status should be non-“Assert”, but it is “Assort”.
Wake-up Status should be “Assert”, but it is non-“Assort”.
Switch Status should be “OFF”, but it is “ON”.
Switch Status should be “ON”, but it is “OFF”.
Module dose not exist.
Module exists. (not error)
Command Line is wrong.
Side band access driver is not resident.
Bluetooth driver for DOS is not resident.
Get Status function of Side band access driver is not normal.
No reply to inquiry
Device Descriptor can not be acquired. USB I/F is not normal.
Sideband reset timeout occurs.
Descriptor type is wrong.
Descriptor is acquired in spite of Detach condition.
Configuration file open is not normal.
Contents of Configuration file are wrong.
BD_ADDR is wrong (00)
BD_ADDR is wrong (FF)
BD_ADDR is wrong (bit0=1)
BD_ADDR is wrong (bit1=1)
BD_ADDR is wrong (address defined as an error)
Suspended during Hard ware switch confirmation.
RSSI value is less than the standard value.
Holts
(reserved)

Number 0x30 to 0x40 are common error codes of the test program.

3-82

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program

3.28.4

3 Tests and Diagnostics

IEEE1394 test

To execute this test, press 4 and Enter.
NOTE:

Use another computer that can communicate by IEEE1394 (i. Link) cable as a
reference machine to perform this test.

The following menu will appear:
********************************************************************
********
IEEE1394[XXXXX] Diagnostics program
**************
********************************************************************
*
*
*
1 ....(Transmit & Receive test)
*
*
*
*
2 ....(Responder set)
*
*
*
*
3 ....(1394 GUID Display)
*
*
*
********************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3] ?

To execute the TEST, select the test number you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest01
NOTE:

Transmit & Receive test
Before executing subtest 01, be sure to execute subtest 02 in the responder
machine.
This program checks the data transporting between responder machine and
target machine and compare them with the original data through the
IEEE1394 cable.

Subtest 02

Responder set
This program is executed in the responder machine to initialize the responder
machine with the IEEE1394 cable connected to the target machine before
executing subtest 01.

Subtest 03

1394 GUID Display
This program checks the GUID of IEEE1394.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-83

3 Tests and Diagnostics
3

3.29 Sound Test program

Tests and Diagnostics

3.29 Sound Test program
This section describes how to perform the Sound test. To execute the sound test, refer to the
following description.
Prepare a HDD and format it on DOS. Copy all files in the floppy disk in which the Sound
test program is stored to the HDD. Reboot the computer from the HDD. The following
message will appear:
###############################################################
######
WSS, Sound blaster pro Diagnostics program
#####
###############################################################
*
*
*
1 ............
Sound (Standard)
*
*
*
*
2 ............
Sound (Legacy)
*
*
*
*
3 ............
CD Sound (Standard)
*
*
*
*
4 ............
CD Sound (Legacy)
*
*
*
*
---It outputs at the speaker and lineout--*
*
*
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-4] ?

Input the test number and press Enter.
3.29.1 Sound (Standard) test
To execute the Sound (Standard) test, press 1 and Enter. The following menu will appear in
the display.
###############################################################
######
ICH4-M + AD1981A Diagnostics program
######
###############################################################
*
*
*
1 ............
( Microphone recording & play )
*
*
2 ............
( Sine wave )
*
*
3 ............
( Line IN recording & play )
*
*
*
*
9 ............
Exit to Main
*
*
*
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3, 9] ?

3-84

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.29 Sound Test program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

To return to the Sound test menu, press 9 and Enter. Then following message will appear in
the display.
***********************************
********
May I Restart ? *******
***********************************
Press any key to continue…

After pressing any key, the machine starts rebooting and sound test menu will appear in the
display.
Subtest 01

Microphone recording & play
This subtest checks the function of the CODEC A/D, D/A converter.
When this subtest is selected, the following message will appear.
[Recording & play test !]

And the following message will appear.
DOS/4GW Protected Mode Run-time Version X.XX
Copyright (c) Tenberry Software, Inc. XXXX

After this message appears, display stops briefly. In this timing, sound is
recorded from internal microphone.
After the recording is completed, the computer plays back the sound recorded
after the following message.
STACWAVE Version X.XX
Build data: XXX XX XXXX at XX:XX:XX
Loading “mic.wav”.

NOTE:

The message in the display might have slight difference from those above.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-85

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 02

3.29 Sound Test program

Sine wave
This subtest is executed by loading the COM file (ADSIN.COM). The
program expands sine wave data table from 16KB to 64KB, and creates the
play data. Then it transfers the data between the DMA and the CODEC to
play the sine wave. (It sounds like a continuous beep). By using wave
measurable devices such as an oscilloscope, the data can be measured as a
sine wave.
When the subtest is executed, the sine wave is played while expanding sine
wave from 16KB to 64KB.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.

Subtest 03

Line IN recording & play
This subtest executes the same test as the subtest01 by recorded sound from
the different port (Line-in port).
For more details on the subtest, refer to the subtest01 Microphone recording &
play.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.

3.29.2 Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the Sound (Legacy) test, select 2 and press Enter.
NOTE:

3-86

Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.29 Sound Test program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29.3 CD Sound (Standard) test
To execute the CD Sound (Standard) test, press 3 and Enter. Insert the test media
(TOSHIBA TEST CD-ROM or ABEX TEST CD-ROM) or music CD on the market (if the
test media can not be prepared). Following menu appears in the display.
For details on use of test media, refer to 3.28.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media).
For details on use of audio CD on the market, refer to 3.28.3.2 Audio CD.

3.29.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media)
CD/DVD TEST

IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX

SUB-TEST
PASS COUNT
WRITE DATA
ADDRESS

XX
XXXXX
XX
XXXXXX

01
02
03
04

–
–
–
-

:
:
:
:

xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop

ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS
: XXX

Japanese Narration
English Narration
Test Tone A (100Hz – 20Hz)
Test Tone B (400Hz – 3KHz L-R)
Drive #
Command
[[Block
[[Block

= 0, ATAPI status =00
= XX
address = XXXXXXXX]]
length = XXXXXXXX]]

Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX

Subtest 01

Japanese Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in Japanese starts and following message
appears in the display.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key .

Press any key and stop the narration. Then return to the CD Sound (Standard)
test menu.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-87

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Subtest 02

3.29 Sound Test program

English Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in English starts.
For more details on the procedure, refer to the subtest01.

Subtest 03

Test Tone A

CAUTION: Before starting subtest03, be sure to set the sound at proper volume.
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 100Hz to 20Hz.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
Subtest 04

Test Tone B
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 400Hz to 3KHz
and also changing the channel from left speaker to right speaker.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.

CAUTION: This model does not support the CD Sound (Standard) test.

3-88

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.29 Sound Test program

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.29.3.2 Audio CD
Insert an audio CD and the following menu appears in the display.
CD/DVD TEST

IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX

SUB-TEST
PASS COUNT
WRITE DATA
ADDRESS

XX
XXXXX
XX
XXXXXX

:
:
:
:

xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
; key stop

ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS
: XXX

CD Sound track number (01-98 : Track) ?
Drive #
Command
[[Block
[[Block

= 0, ATAPI status =00
= XX
address = XXXXXXXX]]
length = XXXXXXXX]]

Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX

Select the track number you want to test and press Enter twice.
The following message appears in the display and selected track is played.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key

After pressing any key, the music stops and the display returns to the selection menu of the
track number.
NOTE:

When the CD-ROM test is executed, [ALL DEVICE] must be selected in the
“Device Config.=” of the BIOS SETUP. If the “ALL DEVICE” is not selected,
music can not be played.

3.29.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the CD Sound (Legacy) test, select 4 and press Enter.
CAUTION: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-89

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30 SETUP

3.30 SETUP
3.30.1 Function Description
This program displays the current system setup information as listed below:
1. Memory
(a) Total
2. System Date/Time
(a) Date (MM-DD-YYYY)
(b) Time (HH:MM:SS)
3. Battery
(a) Battery Save Mode
(b) PCI Express Link ASPM
(c) Enhanced C-States
4. Password
5. HDD Password
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

HDD
HDD Password Mode
User Password
Master Password

6. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
(b) HDD Priority
(c) Network Boot Protocol
7. Others
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

3-90

Core Multi-Processing
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
Execute-Disable Bit Capability
Virtualization Technology
Auto Power On
Beep Volume
Diagnostic Mode
Language During Bootup

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.30 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

8. Configuration
(a) Device Config.
9. Drives I/O
(a) Built-in HDD
(b) CD-ROM
10. PCI Bus
(a) PCI Bus
11. Security Controller
(a) TPM
(b) Clear TPM Owner
12. Display
(a) Power On Display
(b) LCD Display Stretch
13. Peripheral
(a) Internal Pointing Device
14. Legacy Emulation
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
(c) USB Memory BIOS Support Type
15. PCI LAN
(a) Built-in LAN

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-91

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30 SETUP

3.30.2 Accessing the SETUP Program
Turn on the power while pressing ESC, the following menu appears.
Check system. Then press [F1] key.

Then press F1. The following display appears.

NOTE: *1: This appears in Intel ® CoreTM models.
*2: This appears in PORTÉGÉ M500 (only PPM51) and TECRA M6.
*3: This appears in models that have 10/100M Ether Net LAN.
*4: This appears in models that have a CPU supporting TPM.
*5: This appears in models that have a CPU supporting this function.

3-92

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.30 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Moving Within the SETUP Menu and Changing Values
1. Press Å and Æ to move between the two columns. Press ↑ and ↓ to move between
items in a column. Press Fn+↑ (PgUp) and Fn + ↓ (PgDn) to move between the
two pages.
2. Press either the Space bar or Back Space to change the value.
Accepting Changes and Exiting the SETUP Window
1. Press End to accept the changes you made.
If the changed item does not require the system to reboot, the following message is
displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)

If the changed item requires the system to reboot, the following message is displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.

2. To make other changes, press N. Repeat the steps above.
3. To accept the changes, press Y.
NOTE: You can press Esc to quit at any time without saving changes. SETUP asks you
to confirm that you do not want to save your changes. When SETUP is displayed
at the next time, the current configuration appears.
The Factory Preset Configuration
When you access SETUP, the current configuration is displayed.
1. To show the factory preset configuration, press Home.
2. Press End and then press Y to accept the factory preset settings.
NOTE: When you execute the default setting, the following settings are not changed:
Password
Execute-Disable Bit function

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-93

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30 SETUP

SETUP Options
The SETUP screen is divided into functionally related groups. This section describes each
group and its options.
1. Memory
This group of options displays the computer’s memory.
(a) Total
This field displays the total amount of memory installed and is automatically
calculated by the computer. You cannot change this value.
2. System Date/Time
Use this option to set the computer’s system date/time. Press ↓ to move the cursor to
the right and press ↑ to move the cursor to the left. Press the space bar to increase
the number and press BkSp to decrease the number.
(a) Date
Use this option to set the system date of the computer.
(b) Time
Use this option to set the system time of the computer.
3. Battery
This option is used to select Full Power, Low Power or User Setting of the battery
save mode.
Full Power

3-94

The following shows full power settings.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.30 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

Low Power

The following shows low power settings.

(a) Battery Save Mode
When “User Setting” is selected, the sub-window, BATTERY SAVE
OPTION is displayed. The following set of options can be selected in the
submenu.
Processing Speed
This feature changes the CPU processing speed.
High

CPU operates at high speed. (Default)

Low

CPU operates at low speed.

CPU Sleep Mode
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU sleep function.
Enabled

Enables sleep mode. (Default)

Disabled

Disables sleep mode.

LCD Brightness
Use this option to set the level of LCD brightness.
Super-Bright

Full brightness for maximum visibility.

Bright

Full brightness for high visibility. (Default)

Semi-Bright

Less than full brightness for saving power.

Cooling Method
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on or the processing speed is
lowered automatically. When the CPU temperature falls to a normal range, the
fan turns off.
Maximum performance

Turns on the fan first, and if necessary, lowers
CPU processing speed. (Default)

Battery optimized

Lowers the CPU processing speed first, and if
necessary, turns on the fan.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-95

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30 SETUP

(b) PCI Express Link ASPM
Enabled

Saves power consumption, when the PCI Express device is not
used. (Default)

Auto

Saves power consumption, when the PCI Express device is not
used while the battery is working.

Disabled

Disables the power saving function and gives priority to the
performance.

This lowers the power consumption.

Disabled

This does not lower the power consumption.

4. Password
This option allows you to set or reset the user password for power on.
Not Registered

Change or remove the password. (Default)

For details on setting the user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
5. HDD Password
This option sets HDD password. HDD password is a security function to protect the
built-in HDD.
(a) HDD
This item selects the hard disk to set HDD password.
Built-in HDD

Sets HDD password for the built-in HDD

(b) HDD Password Mode
This item registers HDD password and can be selected only for registering
HDD password. To change HDD Password Mode when HDD password is
registered, delete the registered HDD password first, and then register new
password.

3-96

User Only

Sets only User HDD Password (Default)

Master+User

Sets Master HDD Password and User HDD Password

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.30 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

(c) User Password
This item sets User password.
For details on setting user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
(d) Master Password
This item sets the Master HDD password.
This can be set Master+User is set in the HDD password Mode. For details,
refer to the User’s Manual.
6. Boot Priority
This tab sets the priority for booting the computer and the priority for the built-in
HDD or optional secondary HDD.
(a) Boot Priority
HDD→FDD→CD-ROM→LAN:

FDD→HDD→CD-ROM→LAN:

HDD→CD-ROM→LAN→FDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD, FDD, CDROM and LAN. (Default)
The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD, HDD, CDROM and LAN.
The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and FDD.

FDD→CD-ROM→LAN→HDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and HDD.

CD-ROM→LAN→HDD→FDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
HDD and FDD.

CD-ROM→LAN→FDD→HDD:

The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
FDD and HDD.

NOTE: CD-ROM refers to a DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-97

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30 SETUP

(b) HDD Priority
This option enables to select the priority for the Built-in HDD or USB.
Built-in HDD→ USB (Default)
USB → Built-in HDD
(c) Network Boot Protocol
Use this option to set the starting method via a network.
PXE
RPL

Sets to PXE protocol. (Default)
Sets to RPL protocol.

7. Others
Whether or not you need to configure the computer with these options depends
primarily on the kind of software or peripherals you use.
(a) Core-Multi Processing
The Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode of Core MultiProcessor.
Enabled

Enables Core Multi-Processing functions. (Default)

Disabled

Disables Core Multi-Processing functions.

(b) Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
Use this option to choose a setting from the followings.
Dynamically Switchable
Enables Intel SpeedStep technology. When the computer is
in use, the CPU power consumption and clock speed are
automatically switched when necessary. (Default)

3-98

Always High

Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at its fastest speed.

Always Low

Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at low power consumption and low speed.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.30 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

(c) Execute-Disable Bit Capability
Selects the function to reports whether the CPU Execute-Disable Bit is
available or not to OS. When the CMOS is damaged, the default is Available.
When Home is pressed, the setting is not changed and the setting is kept.
Available

Reports that the function is available.

Not Available

Reports that the function is not available. (Default)

(d) Virtualization Technology
Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel Virtualization
Technology installed in the CPU.
Intel Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to
operate as multiple virtual machines.
Enabled

Enables Virtualization Technology.

Disabled

Disables Virtualization Technology. (Default)

(e) Auto Power On
Use this option to set a time and date for automatic power on and enable or
disable the ring indicator feature. Alarm Date Option appears only when
Alarm Time is enabled.
OPTIONS
Alarm Time
Alarm Date Option
Wake-up on LAN

= 00:00:00
= Disabled
= Disabled*

*Only for LAN Model

Alarm Time is set in the sequence of hours and minutes. Seconds cannot be
changed. Alarm Date Option is set in the sequence of month and day. If
Alarm Date is set to Disabled, the computer will be powered on at the same
time every day. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the right and ↑ to move the
cursor to the left when you set the date and time.
NOTE: 1. Do not remove the AC adapter and battery pack at the same time when you use
this feature. If you do so, data saved by the resume function will be lost. You
must also reset this option.
2. When a password is set in Password Security, the system is in standby mode,
the Timer on function (Auto Power PN) is set and the system is booted,
“Password =” is displayed. When the password set in Password Security is
input, the computer returns to Windows from standby mode.
3. This function is effective only once, it is released after booting up.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-99

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30 SETUP

(f) Beep Volume
This option selects the volume of beep (Warning). “OFF”, “Low”, “Medium”
(Default) or “High” can be selected. If a memory module that does not comply
with the standards, the computer beeps at maximum volume.
(g) Diagnostic Mode
This option sets whether the BIOS Setup Diagnostic test is enabled.
Disabled

The Diagnostic test is disabled. (Default)

Enabled

The Diagnostic test is enabled.

(h) Language During Bootup
This option selects the language during bootup. This message appears only on
the model for TCL (Canada).
English

The message is displayed in English. (Default)

French

The message is displayed in French.

8. Configuration
This option displays the configuration method.
(a) Device Config.
The devices are initialized when the PNP OS loads.
Setup by OS

First, devices necessary for loading the OS will be
initialized. After the PNP OS loads, the OS will
initialize other devices. In this case, setup of PC Cards
will be fixed to “Auto-Selected” and cannot be
changed. (Default)

All Devices

All devices will be initialized.

If you are using an OS that does not have PNP capacity, select “All Devices.”
The Display shows the following message:
Device Config. = All Devices

3-100

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.30 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

9. Drives I/O
This option displays the address/interrupt level for hard disk drive and optical drive.
It is only for information and cannot be changed.
(a) Built-in HDD
This option displays the setting of the address and interrupt level of the HDD.
This cannot be changed.
(b) CD-ROM
This option displays the setting of the address and interrupt level of the
installed drive. This cannot be changed. Even if an installed drive is not CDROM drive, “CD-ROM” is displayed.
10. PCI Bus
This item displays the interrupt level for the Card Bus. It is for information only and
cannot be changed.
PCI BUS = IRQ10, IRQ11
11. Security controller
(a) TPM
Disables the security controller called TPM (Trusted Platform Module).
When the cursor is on the Enable (Disable) and the Space is pressed,
message is displayed and the PC waits Y or N key input by the user.
When Y is pressed, it is sets to Enable (Disable). After changing, the cursor
could not be moved on the TPM tem. This option can be changed after
rebooting.
Disabled

Disables the TPM. (Default)

Enabled

Enables the TPM.

(b) Clear TPM Owner
This is not displayed when the TPM is set to Disabled. This is executed,
when the PC is disposed or the owner of the PC changes.
When the cursor is on this item and the Space is pressed, message is
displayed and the PC waits Y, E, S and Enter key inputs by the user.
When Y, E, S and Enter keys are pressed, the data is disposed.
After changing, the display of TPM item is changed to Disabled and this item
becomes not displayed and the cursor could not be moved on the TPM item.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-101

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3.30 SETUP

12. Display
This group of options configures the computer’s display.
(a) Power On Display
This option is used to select the display when booting up.
Auto-Selected

Selects an external monitor if one is connected.
Otherwise it selects the internal LCD. (Default)

LCD+AnalogRGB

Selects both the internal LCD and the external monitor
for simultaneous display.

NOTE: Pressing Fn+F5 changes the display setting in the order of internal LCD to
simultaneous to external monitor.
(b) LCD Display Stretch
LCD Display Stretch enables or disables a larger display area of the screen.
Enabled

Enables the LCD display stretch feature. (Default)

Disabled

Disables the LCD display stretch feature.

13. Peripheral
Use this option to select the parallel port mode and hard disk mode.
(a) Internal Pointing Device
This option enables and disables the Touch Pad.

3-102

Enabled

Enables the Touch Pad. (Default)

Disabled

Disables the Touch Pad.

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

3.30 SETUP

3 Tests and Diagnostics

14. Legacy Emulation.
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation. If
your operating system does not support USB, you can still use a USB mouse
and keyboard by setting the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation item to
Enabled.
Enabled

USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)

Disabled

USB Legacy Support cannot be used.

(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Enabled

USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)

Disabled

USB Legacy Support cannot be used.

Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent to the HDD
(Default).
Based on the [HDD] order in the [Boot Priority Options] item.
The order with respect to the other HDD can be set in the
[HDD Priority Options] item.

FDD

Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent to the FDD.
Based on the [FDD] order in the [Boot Priority Options] item.

15. PCI LAN
This option enables/disables the Built-in LAN functions.
(a) Built-in LAN
Enabled

Enables Built-in LAN functions. (Default)

Disabled

Disables Built-in LAN functions.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3-103

3 Tests and Diagnostics

3-104

[CONFIDENTIAL]

3.30 SETUP

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Chapter 4
Replacement Procedures

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Replacement Procedures

4-ii

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4 Replacement Procedures

Chapter 4

Contents

4.1

General....................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2

Battery pack ............................................................................................................... 4-8

4.3

PC card..................................................................................................................... 4-10

4.4

Bridge media............................................................................................................ 4-11

4.5

HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.6

Optical drive ............................................................................................................ 4-15

4.7

Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-18

4.8

Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-21

4.9

Cover FAT assembly ............................................................................................... 4-23

4.10

Fingerprint sensor board .......................................................................................... 4-28

4.11

Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-30

4.12

SW membrane.......................................................................................................... 4-32

4.13

Bluetooth module..................................................................................................... 4-34

4.14

Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-36

4.15

MDC (Modem Daughter Card)................................................................................ 4-38

4.16

Internal microphone ................................................................................................. 4-40

4.17

RTC battery ............................................................................................................. 4-42

4.18

Harness holder/LAN cable....................................................................................... 4-44

4.19

System board/DC-IN jack........................................................................................ 4-47

4.20

Modem jack/Wireless communication SW ............................................................. 4-50

4.21

Fan/CPU................................................................................................................... 4-53

4.22

HDD cable/PC card slot........................................................................................... 4-57

4.23

LCD unit/FL inverter ............................................................................................... 4-59

4.24

Speaker/LCD cable .................................................................................................. 4-65

4.25

Cover latch ............................................................................................................... 4-67

4.26

Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna .............................................................. 4-68

4.27

Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-70

4.28

Battery slider............................................................................................................ 4-72

4.29

Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-73
4.29.1

Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp ................ 4-74

4.29.2

Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp........... 4-85

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-iii

4 Replacement Procedures

Figures
Figure 4-1

Removing the battery pack ............................................................................ 4-8

Figure 4-2

Removing the PC card ................................................................................ 4-10

Figure 4-3

Removing the Bridge media (SD card) ....................................................... 4-11

Figure 4-4

Removing the HDD cover ........................................................................... 4-12

Figure 4-5

Separating the HDD and HDD holder ......................................................... 4-13

Figure 4-6

Removing the optical drive.......................................................................... 4-15

Figure 4-7

Disassembling the optical drive................................................................... 4-16

Figure 4-8

Removing the keyboard holder.................................................................... 4-18

Figure 4-9

Removing the keyboard support plate ......................................................... 4-19

Figure 4-10

Removing the memory module.................................................................... 4-21

Figure 4-11

Removing the Cover FAT assembly (1) ...................................................... 4-23

Figure 4-12

Removing the Cover FAT assembly (2) ...................................................... 4-24

Figure 4-13

Removing the Cover FAT assembly (3) ...................................................... 4-25

Figure 4-14

Removing the Cover FAT assembly (4) ...................................................... 4-26

Figure 4-15

Removing the fingerprint sensor board ....................................................... 4-28

Figure 4-16

Removing the touch pad assembly .............................................................. 4-30

Figure 4-17

Removing the SW membrane (1) ................................................................ 4-32

Figure 4-18

Removing the SW membrane (2) ................................................................ 4-33

Figure 4-19

Removing the Bluetooth module ................................................................. 4-34

Figure 4-20

Removing the wireless LAN card................................................................ 4-36

Figure 4-21

Removing the MDC (Modem Daughter Card) ............................................ 4-38

Figure 4-22

Removing the internal microphone.............................................................. 4-40

Figure 4-23

Removing the RTC battery .......................................................................... 4-43

Figure 4-24

Removing the Harness holder/LAN cable (1) ............................................. 4-44

Figure 4-25

Removing the Harness holder/LAN cable (2) ............................................. 4-45

Figure 4-26

Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (1)............................................. 4-47

Figure 4-27

Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (2)............................................. 4-48

Figure 4-28

Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (3)............................................. 4-48

Figure 4-29

Removing the Modem jack.......................................................................... 4-50

Figure 4-30

Removing the wireless communication SW ............................................... 4-51

4-iv

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4 Replacement Procedures

Figure 4-31

Removing the CPU holder ........................................................................... 4-53

Figure 4-32

Removing the fan......................................................................................... 4-54

Figure 4-33

Removing the CPU ...................................................................................... 4-54

Figure 4-34

Installing the CPU........................................................................................ 4-55

Figure 4-35

Applying new grease ................................................................................... 4-56

Figure 4-36

Removing the HDD cable............................................................................ 4-57

Figure 4-37

Removing the PC card slot .......................................................................... 4-58

Figure 4-38

Removing the display assembly................................................................... 4-59

Figure 4-39

Removing the LCD mask............................................................................. 4-60

Figure 4-40

Removing the FL inverter............................................................................ 4-61

Figure 4-41

Removing the LCD unit............................................................................... 4-62

Figure 4-42

Removing the LCD support ......................................................................... 4-63

Figure 4-43

Removing the speaker.................................................................................. 4-65

Figure 4-44

Removing the LCD cable............................................................................. 4-66

Figure 4-45

Removing the cover latch ............................................................................ 4-67

Figure 4-46

Removing the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna............................ 4-68

Figure 4-47

Removing the hinge ..................................................................................... 4-70

Figure 4-48

Removing the battery slider ......................................................................... 4-72

Figure 4-49 to 4-58 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (1) to (10).........................4-75 to 4-84
Figure 4-59 to 4-62 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (1) to (4) .................. 4-85 to 4-87

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

2-v

4 Replacement Procedures

4-vi

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.1 General

4 Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedures

4.1

General

This section explains how to disassemble the computer and replace Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs). It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one. The chart
below is a guide to which FRUs need to be removed in order to remove others. Always start
by removing the battery pack, next, optional items such as the optional PC card and optional
SD card, then follow the line on the chart to determine which FRU you must remove next in
order to repair the one you think is causing the computer to operate improperly. Refer to the
example at the bottom of the page.

How to see the chart:
This chart shows
which unit(s) you
need to remove in
advance when you
replace one unit.
Example:
When you wan to
replace touch pad, you
need to remove units,
in the hatched boxes
above the boxes in
which the touch pad
is.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-1

4 Replacement Procedures

4.1 General

Safety Precautions
Before you begin disassembly, read the following safety precautions and observe them
carefully as you work.
DANGER: 1) Always use the genuine battery that is authorized by Toshiba or
compatible with the unit. Since other battery packs have different
specifications, they may be incompatible with the unit, and may burst or
explode.
Never heat or disassemble the battery pack, as that could cause leakage
of alkaline solution. Never throw the battery pack into a fire, as that
could cause the battery pack to explode.
2) The power supply, FL inverter and other components carry high
voltages. If you need to turn on the power of a partially disassembled
computer to check its operation, be very careful not to touch connectors
or components, in order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Also, do not disassemble individual components in first-level
maintenance.
WARNING: 1) Turn off the power and disconnect the AC adaptor from the power
source, to avoid exposure to electric shock.
2) Batteries in the computer retain an electrical charge, so there is danger
of electrical shock even when the computer is disconnected from an AC
power source. Remove any metal jewelry or accessories such as
necklaces, bracelets or rings, in order to reduce the risk of electric
shock. Never work with wet or damp hands.
3) Be careful of edges and corners as these may cut.
CAUTION: 1) When you change a component, be sure the replacement component
meets the required specifications. Never use foreign parts, to avoid any
risk of damage to the computer.
2) To avoid any risk of short-circuit, fire or other internal damage, never
allow any metal objects such as screws or paper clips to fall into the
unit. Be sure to replace screws with the same size as those removed.
Make sure all screws are securely fastened. Loose screws can cause
short circuits, resulting in heat, smoke or fire.
3) Before lifting out an FRU or other component, make sure all cables to
the component have been disconnected, in order to reduce the risk of
accidental electric shock.
4) If you use AC power, be sure to use the cable that came with the
computer or one recommended by Toshiba.
5) Make sure that all replacement components meet the specifications for
the computer and that all cables and connectors are securely fastened, in
order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
6) Some parts inside the computer, such as the CPU and cooling module,
become very hot during operation. Conduct repair work after they have
cooled. Be careful around the CPU and cooling module to avoid burns.

4-2

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.1 General

4 Replacement Procedures

Before You Begin
Look over the procedures in this section before you begin disassembling the computer.
Familiarize yourself with the disassembly and reassembly steps. Begin each procedure by
removing the AC adapter and the battery pack as instructed in this section:
1. Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.
2. Use only the correct and approved tools.
3. Make sure the working environment is free from the following elements whether you
are using or storing the computer.
•

Dust and contaminates

•

Static electricity

•

Extreme heat, cold and humidity

4. Make sure the FRU you are replacing is causing the abnormal operation by
performing the necessary diagnostics tests described in this manual.
5. Do not perform any operations that are not necessary and use only the described
procedures for disassembling and installing FRUs in the computer.
6. After removing parts from the computer, place them in a safe place away from the
computer so they will not be damaged and will not interfere with your work.
7. You will remove and replace many screws when you disassemble the computer.
When you remove screws, make sure they are placed in a safe place and identified
with the correct parts.
8. When assembling the computer make sure you use the correct screws to secure the
various pieces in place. Screw sizes are listed in their corresponding figures.
9. The computer contains many sharp edges and corners, so be careful not to injure
yourself.
10. After you have replaced an FRU, make sure the computer is functioning properly by
performing the appropriate test on the FRU you have fixed or replaced.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-3

4 Replacement Procedures

4.1 General

Disassembly Procedures
The computer has two basic types of cable connectors:
•

Pressure Plate Connectors

•

Coaxial Cable Connectors

•

Normal Pin Connectors

To disconnect a Pressure Plate connector, lift up the tabs on either side of the connector’s
plastic pressure plate and slide the cable out of the connector. To connect the cable to a
Pressure Plate connector, make sure the pressure plate is fully lifted and slide the cable into
the connector. Secure the cable in place by pushing the sides of the pressure plate down so
the plate is flush with the sides of the connector. Gently pull on the cable to make sure the
cable is secure. If you pull out the connector, connect it again making sure the connector’s
pressure plate is fully lifted when you insert the cable.
Coaxial cables should be disconnected with an antenna coaxial disconnector.
Normal Pin connectors are used with all other cables. These connectors can be connected
and disconnected by simply pulling them apart or pushing them together.
Assembly Procedures
After you have disassembled the computer and fixed or repaired the problem that was
causing the computer to operate abnormally, you will need to reassemble the computer.
Install all the removed FRUs following the steps described in the corresponding sections in
this chapter.
While assembling the computer, remember the following general points:
•

Take your time, making sure you follow the instructions closely. Most problems
arise when you get in a hurry assembling the computer.

•

Make sure all cables and connectors are securely fastened.

•

Before securing the FRU or other parts, make sure that screws or the FRU will
pinch no cables.

•

Check that all latches are closed securely in place.

•

Make sure all the correct screws are used to secure all FRUs. Using the wrong
screw can either damage the threads on the screw or the head of the screw and
may prevent proper seating of an FRU.

After installing an FRU in the computer, confirm that the FRU and the computer are
functioning properly.

4-4

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.1 General

4 Replacement Procedures

Tools and Equipment
The use of Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment is very important for your safety and the
safety of those around you. Proper use of these devices will increase the success rate of your
repairs and lower the cost for damaged or destroyed parts. The following equipment is
necessary to disassemble and reassemble the computer:
•

One M2 point size 0 Phillips screwdriver

•

One M2.5/M3 point size 1 Phillips screwdriver

•

One screw driver for stud screw

•

One 4 mm flat-blade screwdriver

•

Tweezers, to lift out screws that you cannot grasp with your fingers

•

ESD mats for the floor and the table you are working on

•

An ESD wrist strap or heel grounder

•

Anti-static carpeting or flooring

•

Air ionizers in highly static sensitive areas

•

Plastic card of the size of credit card

•

Antenna coaxial cable disconnector

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-5

4 Replacement Procedures

4.1 General

Screw Tightening Torque
When you fasten screws, be sure to follow the torque list below.
CAUTION: Overtightening can damage components and screws; undertightening can
result in electrical shorts or other damage if screws or components come
loose.
NOTE: Toshiba recommends that you use an electric screw driver for quick and easy
operations.
•

0.167 N·m (1.7 kgf·cm)

•

M2.5

0.294 N·m (3.0 kgf·cm)

•

0.549 N·m (5.6 kgf·cm)

NOTE: The computer contains several flat head screws. These screws have less contact
area with the screwdriver, so be careful to press firmly enough to prevent the
screwdriver from slipping out and damaging the screw head.

4-6

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.1 General

4 Replacement Procedures

Color of Screw Shaft
To avoid mistakes on the screw length, screw shafts are colored as follows:
Even number length screw:

brown

Odd number length screw:

white

Special length screw:

blue

Screws whose lengths are indicated to one or more decimal places such as 2.5 mm or 2.8 mm.
Marking of Screws on the Computer Body
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including
the types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.
Kind of screws

Symbol

BIND screw

FLAT HEAD screw

SUPER THIN HEAD screw

TAPPING screw

Other screws
(Unique screws, STUD, etc.)

Examples:
6 mm BIND screw

12 mm BIND screw

B12

4 mm FLAT HEAD screw
F4
(Indicates the screwed length in round number regardless the length of the stud.)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-7

4 Replacement Procedures

4.2

4.2 Battery pack

Battery pack

Removing the Battery pack
To remove the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-1.
CAUTION: When handling battery packs, be careful not to short circuit the terminals.
Also do not drop, hit or apply impact, do not scratch, break, twist or bend
the battery pack.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and other external devices from the computer.
3. Turn the computer face down.
4. Release the battery lock. Pull out the battery pack while sliding the battery latch
as shown in the following figure.
NOTE: For environmental reasons, do not throw away a spent battery pack.

Battery latch

Battery lock

Battery pack

Figure 4-1 Removing the battery pack

4-8

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.2 Battery pack

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Battery pack
To install the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-1.
CAUTION: The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not properly
replaced, used, handled or disposed of. For environmental reasons, collect
the spent battery packs. Use only batteries recommended by Toshiba for
replacements.

NOTE: Check the battery’s terminals visually. If they are dirty, wipe them clean with a
dry cloth.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and all other external devices to the computer.
3. Push the battery pack into the battery slot. Make sure the battery pack is installed
securely.
4. Slide the battery lock into the lock position.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-9

4 Replacement Procedures

4.3

4.3 PC card

PC card

Removing the PC card
To remove the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-2.
CAUTION: Before you remove the PC card, refer to the card’s documentation and to
your operating system documentation for proper procedures and
precautions.
1. Press the eject button for the PC card you want to remove to extend the button.
2. Press the extended eject button to pop the PC card out.
3. Grasp the PC card and pull it out.

PC card

Eject button

Figure 4-2 Removing the PC card
Installing the PC card
To install the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-2.
1. Insert the PC card into the card slot.
2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.

4-10

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.4 Bridge media

4.4

4 Replacement Procedures

Bridge media

Removing the Bridge media
To remove the Bridge media, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-3.
CAUTION: Before you remove the Bridge media, refer to the card’s documentation and
to your operating system documentation for proper procedures and
precautions.
1. Push the Bridge media in and release it to pop the card out.
2. Grasp the Bridge media and pull it out.
(For an instance, SD card is described in the figure 4-3.)

Bridge media
(SD card)

Figure 4-3 Removing the Bridge media (SD card)
Installing the Bridge media
To install the Bridge media, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-3.
1. Insert the Bridge media in the card slot.
2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-11

4 Replacement Procedures

4.5

4.5 HDD

HDD

CAUTION: When handling the HDD, do not press the top surface as shown by the arrow.
Hold it by the sides.

Removing the HDD
To remove the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-4 and 4-5.
1. Turn the computer upside down.
2. Loosen the screw (with an e-ring) and remove the HDD cover while releasing latches.
3. Pull the tab of the HDD assembly to remove it from the connector of the HDD cable.
Be careful not to damage the connector.
HDD cover

Screw (e-ring)

HDD assembly

Tab

Figure 4-4 Removing the HDD cover

4-12

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.5 HDD

4 Replacement Procedures

NOTE: The following steps describe how to disassemble the HDD assembly, however, do
not disassemble if the HDD is working properly.
4. Place the HDD assembly on a flat surface, and remove the following screws.
•

M3×4S

FLAT HEAD screw

×4

5. Separate the HDD and HDD Holder.
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the top or bottom of the HDD.
M3×4S FLAT HEAD
HDD Holder

M3×4S FLAT HEAD

HDD

Figure 4-5 Separating the HDD and HDD holder

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-13

4 Replacement Procedures

4.5 HDD

Installing the HDD
To install the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-4 and 4-5.
CAUTION: Do not hold the HDD by its top and bottom flat surfaces. It may damage the
HDD.
1. Seat the HDD in the HDD Holder and secure them with the following screws.
•

M3×4S

FLAT HEAD screw

×4

CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the center of the HDD assembly. It may damage
the HDD assembly. Hold the HDD assembly by its corners.
2. Set the connector of the HDD cable upward and connect firmly the HDD assembly
to the connector. Lay the HDD assembly down in the slot.
3. Set the HDD cover and secure it with the screw (with an e-ring).

4-14

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.6 Optical drive

4.6

4 Replacement Procedures

Optical drive

Removing the Optical drive
To remove the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-6 and 4-7.
CAUTION: Do not put fingers in the optical drive. It may cause injury.
1. Remove the following two screws securing the slim select.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

•

M2.5×16B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

2. While sliding the hook in the direction of the arrow in the figure below, remove the
optical drive (from connector on the system board).
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD

M2.5×16B FLAT HEAD

Hook

Optical drive

Figure 4-6 Removing the optical drive

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-15

4 Replacement Procedures

4.6 Optical drive

3. Remove the following screw and the pushing plate.
•

M2×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×2

4. Remove the following screws and the mounting plate.
•

M2×3B

BIND screw

×1

Mounting plate
Pushing plate

M2×3B BIND

M2×3S S-THIN HEAD

Figure 4-7 Disassembling the optical drive

4-16

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.6 Optical drive

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Optical drive
To install the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-6 and 4-7.
1. Set the mounting plate and secure it with the following screw.
•

M2×3B

BIND screw

×1

2. Set the pushing plate and secure it with the following screws.
•

M2×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×2

3. Insert the optical drive firmly into the computer to connect it to the connector on the
system board.
4. Secure the optical drive with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

•

M2.5×16B FLAT HEAD screw

×1

CAUTION: When inserting the slim select bay module, turn the computer face up and
insert it while slightly pressing it down.

Optical drive

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-17

4 Replacement Procedures

4.7

4.7 Keyboard

Keyboard

Removing the Keyboard
To remove the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-8 and 4-9.
1. Turn over the computer and open the display.
2. Insert your fingers into the slits on both sides and lift up the keyboard holder to
remove.
3. Remove the following screws securing the keyboard.
•

M2×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×2

Keyboard holder
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD

M2×3S S-THIN HEAD

Figure 4-8 Removing the keyboard holder

4-18

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.7 Keyboard

4 Replacement Procedures

Remove the following screws and keyboard support plate.
•

M2.5×8B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

5. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the connector CN3230 on the system board and
remove the keyboard.
M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD

Keyboard

Keyboard support plate

Keyboard cable

CN3230

Figure 4-9 Removing the keyboard support plate

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-19

4 Replacement Procedures

4.7 Keyboard

Installing the Keyboard
To install the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-8 and 4-9.
1. Place the keyboard face down on the palm rest.
2. Connect the keyboard cable to the connector CN3230 on the system board.
3. Install the keyboard support plate and secure it with the following screw.
•

M2.5×8B

×1

FLAT HEAD screw

4. Turn the keyboard face up and set it in place.
5. Secure the keyboard with the following screws.
•

M2×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×2

6. Install the keyboard holder and press to secure the latches.

4-20

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.8 Memory module

4.8

4 Replacement Procedures

Memory module

Removing the Memory module
CAUTION: The power must be turned off when you remove or insert a memory module.
Inserting a memory module with the power on might damage the module or
the computer itself.
Never press hard or bend the memory module.
To remove the memory module, make sure the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-10.
1. Remove the following screws and memory cover.
•

M2.5×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×2

2. Press two latches outward to release them.
3. Grasp both sides of the memory module and lift it up slantwise to remove.
M2.5×3S S-THIN HEAD

Memory cover

Memory module A
Latch

Latch

Memory module B

Figure 4-10 Removing the memory module

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-21

4 Replacement Procedures

4.8 Memory module

Installing the Memory module
To install the memory module, make sure that the computer is in boot mode and powered off,
follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-10.
CAUTION: When installing only one memory module, be sure to insert it into the slot A.
Otherwise, the computer or the memory may not work properly.
Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer.
Dust and stains on the connectors may cause memory access problems.
1. Insert the memory module into the connector slantwise and press it to connect firmly.
2. Press down the memory module until it is latched firmly.
3. Seat the memory cover and secure it with the following screws.
•

M2.5×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×2

NOTE: When the power of computer is turned on, the computer checks automatically the
memory size. Confirm that the new memory is detected correctly.
If the memory is not detected, check that it is connected correctly.

4-22

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.9 Cover FAT assembly
4

4 Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedures

4.9

Cover FAT assembly

Removing the Cover FAT assembly
To remove the Cover FAT assembly, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-11 to 4-14.
1. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer and
disconnect the SW membrane cable from the connector CN3260 on the system
board.
2. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer and
disconnect the touch pad cable and fingerprint sensor cable from the connector
CN3240 and CN9520 on the system board.
Insulator

Insulator

SW membrane cable

CN9520
CN3260

Fingerprint
sensor cable
CN3240
Touch pad cable

Figure 4-11 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (1)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-23

4 Replacement Procedures

4.9 Cover FAT assembly

3. Remove following screws.
•

M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw

×2

M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD

Figure 4-12 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (2)

4-24

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.9 Cover FAT assembly

4 Replacement Procedures

Turn the computer face down and remove the following screws on the bottom.
•

M2.5×8B

FLAT HEAD screw

×7 (“8” in the figure below)

•

M2.5×16B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1 (“16” in the figure below)
8
16

Figure 4-13 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (3)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-25

4 Replacement Procedures

4.9 Cover FAT assembly

5. Turn the computer face up and open the display.
6. While releasing the latches on both sides lift up the Cover FAT assembly to remove.

Cover FAT assembly

Figure 4-14 Removing the Cover FAT assembly (4)

4-26

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.9 Cover FAT assembly

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Cover FAT assembly
To install the Cover FAT assembly, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-11 to 4-14.
1. Place the Cover FAT assembly on the base assembly and secure the latches.
CAUTION: When installing Cover FAT assembly, insert the guides of the cover FAT
assembly into the base as shown in the following figure.

2. Secure the Cover FAT assembly with the following screws.
•

M2.5×8B FLAT HEAD screw

×2

3. Turn the computer face up.
4. Connect the SW membrane cable to the connector CN3260 on the system board and
stick a new insulator.
5. Connect the touch pad cable and fingerprint sensor cable to the connector CN3240
and CN9520 on the system board and stick a new insulator.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed insulators.
6. Close the display and turn the computer face down. Secure the Cover FAT assembly
with the following screws.
•

M2.5×8B

FLAT HEAD screw

×7

•

M2.5×16B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-27

4 Replacement Procedures

4.10 Fingerprint sensor board

4.10 Fingerprint sensor board
Removing the Fingerprint sensor board
To remove the fingerprint sensor board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-15.
1. Lift up the hook and remove the bracket while sliding it in the direction of arrow in
the figure below.
2. Remove the fingerprint sensor board fixed with the double-sided tape and peel off
the tape that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
3. Disconnect the fingerprint sensor cable from the connector on the fingerprint sensor
board.
Fingerprint sensor cable
Hook

Bracket

Guide
Fingerprint sensor board

Guide
Double-sided tape

Figure 4-15 Removing the fingerprint sensor board

4-28

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.10 Fingerprint sensor board

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Fingerprint sensor board
To install the fingerprint sensor board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-15.
1. Connect the fingerprint sensor cable to the connector on the fingerprint sensor
board.
2. Stick a new double-sided tape in place and install the fingerprint sensor board
while inserting it under the guides.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed double-sided tape.
3. Place the bracket while sliding it under the guides and inserting the slit into the
guide.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-29

4 Replacement Procedures

4.11 Touch pad

4.11 Touch pad
Removing the Touch pad
To remove the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-16.
1. Remove the following screws securing the touch pad assembly.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×4

2. Remove the touch pad cover and touch pad (fixed with the double sided tape).
3. Peel off the double-sided tape that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
4. Remove the fingerprint sensor cable on the touch pad.
5. Open the insulator and disconnect touch pad cable from the touch pad assembly.
M2×4B BIND

Touch pad cover
Fingerprint sensor cable
M2×4B BIND

Insulator
Touch pad cable
Double-sided tape
Touch pad

Figure 4-16 Removing the touch pad assembly

4-30

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.11 Touch pad

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Touch pad
To install the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-16.
1. Open the insulator and connect the touch pad cable to the connector on the touch
pad assembly.
2. Seat the fingerprint sensor cable on the touch pad.
3. Stick a new double-sided tape in place.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed double-sided tape.
4. Install a new touch pad to the slot and touch pad cover on it.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed touch pad.
5. Secure the touch pad assembly with the following screws.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

×4

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-31

4 Replacement Procedures

4.12 SW membrane

4.12 SW membrane
Removing the SW membrane
To remove the SW membrane, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-17 and 4-18.
1. Lift up the hook and slide the SW membrane holder in the direction of the arrow in
the figure to remove it.

SW membrane holder
Hook

Figure 4-17 Removing the SW membrane (1)

4-32

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.12 SW membrane

4 Replacement Procedures

2. Push down the hook and slide the SW membrane in the direction in the figure below.
3. Remove the SW membrane.

Hook
SW membrane

Figure 4-18 Removing the SW membrane (2)
Installing the SW membrane
To install the SW membrane, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-17 and 4-18.
1. Install the SW membrane in the SW membrane holder while sliding it in the
opposite direction at removing.
2. Install the SW membrane holder (with the SW membrane) to the slot while sliding
it in the opposite direction at removing.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-33

4 Replacement Procedures

4.13 Bluetooth module

4.13 Bluetooth module
Removing the Bluetooth module
To remove the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-19.
1. Remove the following screws to remove the Bluetooth module.
•

M2×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

2. Disconnect the Bluetooth cable from the connector CN4400 on the system board.
3. Disconnect the Bluetooth cable and Bluetooth antenna cable from the connector on
the Bluetooth module.
Bluetooth cable
M2×4B FLAT HEAD

Bluetooth module

CN4400

Bluetooth antenna cable

Figure4-19 Removing the Bluetooth module

4-34

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.13 Bluetooth module

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Bluetooth module
To install the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-19.
1. Connect the Bluetooth cable and Bluetooth antenna cable to the connector on the
Bluetooth module.
2. Connect the Bluetooth cable to the connector CN4400 on the system board.
3. Secure the Bluetooth module with the following screws.
•

M2×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

×1

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-35

4 Replacement Procedures

4.14 Wireless LAN card

4.14 Wireless LAN card
Removing the Wireless LAN card
To remove the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-20.
1. Peel off the glass tape.
2. Disconnect the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) from the wireless
LAN card using an antenna coaxial cable disconnector.
3. Remove the following screws and wireless LAN card cover.
•

M2×4B

•

Security torx screw or

×1

BIND screw
M2×4B BIND screw

×1

NOTE: In models with 11ch type of 802.11 a/b/g wireless LAN card, the wireless LAN
card cover and security torx screw are used.
4. With grasping both the sides, disconnect the wireless LAN card from the connector
CN2600 on the system board.
Glass tape
Security torx or
M2x4B BIND
Wireless LAN card cover

Wireless LAN card

M2x4B BIND
Wireless LAN antenna
cables
CN2600

Figure 4-20 Removing the wireless LAN card

4-36

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.14 Wireless LAN card

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Wireless LAN card
To install the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-20.
1. Insert slantingly the wireless LAN card into the connector CN2600 on the system
board.
2. Gently push the wireless LAN card down and secure the wireless LAN card with the
following screw.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×1

3. Seat the wireless LAN card cover in place and secure it with the following screw.
•

Security torx screw or

M2×4B BIND screw

×1

4. Connect the wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) to the connectors on the
wireless LAN card.
5. Stick the glass tape.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-37

4 Replacement Procedures

4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)

4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)
Removing the MDC
To remove the MDC, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-21.
1. Remove the following screws securing the MDC.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×2

CAUTION: When removing the MDC, lift it up right above. Otherwise, the MDC or
connector may be damaged.
2. Lift up the MDC to disconnect it from the connector CN3010 on the system board.
3. Disconnect the modem cable from the connector on the MDC.
M2×4B BIND
MDC

CN3010
Modem cable

Figure 4-21 Removing the MDC (Modem Daughter Card)

4-38

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.15 MDC (Modem Daughter Card)

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the MDC
To install the MDC, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-21.
1. Connect the modem cable to the connector on the MDC.
2. Set the MDC and press it carefully to connect it to the connector CN3010 on the
system board. Be careful not to damage the MDC and connector.
3. Secure the MDC with the following screws.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×2

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-39

4 Replacement Procedures

4.16 Internal microphone

4.16 Internal microphone
Removing the Internal microphone
To remove the internal microphone, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-22.
1. Peel off the glass tape and take out the microphone holder.
2. Disconnect the microphone cable from the connector CN6050 on the system board
and take out the internal microphone from the slot.

Glass tape
Microphone
holder
Internal
microphone

CN6050

Figure 4-22 Removing the internal microphone

4-40

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.16 Internal microphone

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Internal microphone
To install the internal microphone, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-22.
1. Install the internal microphone and microphone holder to the slot of the front panel.
CAUTION: When installing the microphone, the projection of the microphone shall
contact the guide of the base assembly as shown in the following figure.

Microphone
Projection
Guide

2. Connect the microphone cable to the connector CN6050 on the system board
3. Stick the glass tape on the microphone cable.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-41

4 Replacement Procedures

4.17 RTC battery

4.17 RTC battery
WARNING: When replacing the RTC battery, be sure to use a genuine battery
authorized by Toshiba. Installing the wrong battery could cause a battery
explosion or other damage.
If the RTC battery is found abnormal, it must not be installed. Replace it
with a new battery, and dispose of the old one according to the local
regulations.
Check for any of the following signs of damage:
1) Electrolyte leakage
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Corrosion (greenish color) on the battery connector or cable
Corrosion on the computer’s battery connector
White powder on any part of the battery
White powder in the battery tray
Clear liquid on the battery
Clear liquid in the battery tray
Clear liquid on any board near the battery

2) Damage to the connection cable
3) Damage to the connector housing
If any powder or liquid is found in or around the battery tray, clean it. Be
careful not to let any leaked material contact your eyes or mouth. Do not
inhale fumes from leaked material.
If leaked material contacts your skin, eyes or mouth, wash the affected area
thoroughly with clean water.

4-42

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.17 RTC battery

4 Replacement Procedures

Removing the RTC battery
To remove the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-23.
1. Disconnect the RTC battery cable from the connector CN9300 on the system board.
2. Open the insulator and remove the RTC battery.

RTC battery cable
CN9300

RTC battery

Insulator

Figure 4-23 Removing the RTC battery
Installing the RTC battery
To install the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-23.
1. Set the RTC battery in place and wrap it with the insulator.
2. Connect the RTC battery cable to the connector CN9300 on the system board.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-43

4 Replacement Procedures

4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable

4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable
To remove the Harness holder / LAN cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-24
and 4-25.
1. Disconnect the LCD cable and LAN cable from the connectors CN5000 and
CN4100 on the system board.
2. Remove the following screw securing the harness holder.
•

M2.5×4B

×1

FLAT HEAD screw

M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
LCD cable

CN5000

LAN cable

CN4100

Figure 4-24 Removing the Harness holder / LAN cable (1)

4-44

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable

4 Replacement Procedures

3. Take out the LAN cable from the harness holder.
4. Remove the harness holder while lifting up the LCD cable and LAN cable.
5. Take out the LAN jack from the LAN jack slot.

Harness holder

LAN cable

LAN jack

Harness holder

Figure 4-25 Removing the Harness holder / LAN cable (2)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-45

4 Replacement Procedures

4.18 Harness holder / LAN cable

Installing the Harness holder / LAN cable
To install the Harness holder / LAN cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-24
and 4-25.
1. Install the LAN jack into the slot.
2. Pass the LCD cable and LAN cable in the guide of the harness holder and install the
harness holder and secure it with the following screw.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

CAUTION: When passing the LCD cable and LAN cable, refer to the following figure.

Harness holder
LCD cable

LAN cable

3. Connect the LCD cable and LAN cable to the connectors CN5000 and CN4100 on
the system board.

4-46

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.19 System board / DC-IN jack

4 Replacement Procedures

4.19 System board / DC-IN jack
To remove the System board / DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-26 to
4-28.
1. Remove two glass tapes on the wireless LAN antenna cable and speaker cable.
2. Disconnect the speaker cable from the connector CN6170 on the system board.

Glass tape

Speaker cable
CN6170
Glass tape

Wireless LAN antenna cable

Figure 4-26 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (1)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-47

4 Replacement Procedures

4.19 System board / DC-IN jack

3. Take out the DC-IN jack from the slot and remove the system board left-upward
with the left side up.

System board

DC-IN jack

Figure 4-27 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (2)
4. Disconnect the DC-IN jack cable from the connector CN8800 on the system board.

DC-IN jack cable

CN8800

Figure 4-28 Removing the System board / DC-IN jack (3)

Installing the System board / DC-IN jack

4-48

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.19 System board / DC-IN jack

4 Replacement Procedures

To install the System board / DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-26 to
4-28.
1. Connect the DC-IN jack cable to the connector CN8800 on the system board.
2. Insert the right side connectors of the system board into the slots of the base assembly
and install the system board.
3. Insert the DC-IN jack in to the slot of base assembly.
4. Connect the speaker cable to the connector CN6170 on the system board.
5. Stick two glass tapes on the wireless LAN cable and speaker cable.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-49

4 Replacement Procedures

4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW

4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW
To remove the Modem jack / Wireless communication SW, follow the steps below and refer
to Figure 4-29 to 4-30.
1. Remove the following screw and the Modem jack holder.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

2. Remove the Modem jack stuck to the base assembly with a double sided tape from
the slot.
3. Open the insulator and remove the Modem jack cable from the slot of the base
assembly.

Modem jack holder
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Modem jack cable

Modem jack
Insulator

Figure 4-29 Removing the Modem jack

4-50

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW

4 Replacement Procedures

4. Push the wireless communication SW from the inside of the base assembly to
remove.

Wireless communication SW

Figure 4-30 Removing the wireless communication SW
Installing the Modem jack / Wireless communication SW
To install the Modem jack / Wireless communication SW, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-29 and 4-30.
1. Insert the wireless communication SW into the hole of the base assembly from the
outside.
2. Install the Modem jack into the slot of the base assembly and pass the Modem jack
cable into the slot and close the insulator.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-51

4 Replacement Procedures

4.20 Modem jack / Wireless communication SW

3. Install the Modem jack holder and secure it with the following screw.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×1

CAUTION: When installing the Modem jack holder, insert the tip of the modem jack
holder under the hook of the base assembly.

Hook

Modem jack holder

CAUTION: When installing the wireless communication SW, make sure the switch of the
wireless communication SW works properly.

Switch

4-52

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.21 Fan/CPU

4 Replacement Procedures

4.21 Fan/CPU
Removing the Fan/CPU
To remove the fan/CPU, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-31 to 4-33.
CAUTION: 1) The CPU can become very hot during operation. Be sure to let it cool
before starting repair work.
2) When you remove the heat sink, wipe the grease off of the bottom of the
heat sink and top of the CPU. Apply new grease when installing.
1. Remove the glass tape on the back of the system board and disconnect the fan cable
from the connector CN8771 on the system board.
2. Remove the following screws securing the CPU holder in the opposite order of the
marks (number) on the holder and remove the CPU holder.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×3
M2×4B BIND

CPU holder

Glass tape

Fan cable

CN8781

Figure 4-31 Removing the CPU holder

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-53

4 Replacement Procedures

4.21 Fan/CPU

3. Remove the following screws and fan.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

Fan
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD

M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD

Figure4-32 Removing the fan
4. Unlock the CPU by turning the cam counterclockwise on the CPU socket by 90
degrees with a flat-blade screwdriver.

Figure 4-33 Removing the CPU
5. Remove the CPU.
CAUTION: When removing the CPU, lift it up right above. Otherwise, pins of CPU may
be damaged.

4-54

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.21 Fan/CPU

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Fan/CPU
To install the fan/CPU, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-31 to 4-35.
1. Make sure the cam is in the open position.
2. Seat the CPU in the CPU socket. Make sure the direction and position of CPU is
correct to avoid damaging pins on the CPU.
CAUTION: Place the CPU in such direction as shown below. (Pay attention to the
position of the triangle mark on the CPU.)
3. Fix the CPU by turning the cam on the CPU socket by 90 degrees clockwise with a
flat-blade screwdriver (in the order shown in the figure below).

Figure 4-34 Installing the CPU

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-55

4 Replacement Procedures

4.21 Fan/CPU

4. Apply new grease on the CPU using a special syringe as shown in the following
figure. Apply quarter of scale (0.25ml) of grease evenly on the CPU chip. When
silicon grease is already applied to the CPU, wipe them off with a close in advance.
CAUTION: When installing the CPU, apply new grease on the top of the CPU chip.
When installing the fin, make sure the bottom of the fin covers the top of the
CPU.

Figure 4-35 Applying new grease
5. Install the CPU heat sink.
6. Place the CPU holder and secure it with the following screws in the order of the
number marked on the holder.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×3

CAUTION: Tighten the screws in the order of mark “1”, “2” and “3” on the CPU
holder.
7. Place the fan and secure it with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

8. Connect the fan cable to the connector CN8781 and stick the glass tape.

4-56

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot
4

4 Replacement Procedures

Replacement Procedures

4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot
Removing the HDD cable/PC card slot
To remove the HDD cable/PC card slot, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-36 and
4-37.
1. Lift up the HDD cable from the slot of the HDD cable holder and remove the
following screw.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×1

2. Remove HDD cable from the connector CN1850 on the system board.
3. Remove the HDD cable holder.
HDD cable

M2×4B BIND
HDD cable holder

CN1850

Figure 4-36 Removing the HDD cable

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-57

4 Replacement Procedures

4.22 HDD cable/PC card slot

4. Peel the insulator and remove the following screws (on the back of the system
board).
•

M2×3S

×2

S-THIN HEAD screw

5. Open two latches outward and remove the PC card slot from the system board.

M2×3S S-THIN HEAD

Insulator
PC card slot
Latch

Figure 4-37 Removing the PC card slot
Installing the HDD cable/PC card slot
To install the HDD cable/PC card slot, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-36 and 437.
1. Install the PC card slot and secure it with the following screws.
•

M2×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×2

2. Connect the HDD cable to the connector CN1850 on the back of the system board.
3. Install the HDD cable holder on the system board and secure it with the following
screw.
•

M2×4B

BIND screw

×1

4. Arrange the HDD cable on the HDD cable holder in place.

4-58

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter

4 Replacement Procedures

4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter
Removing the LCD unit/FL inverter
To remove the LCD unit/FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-38 to 4-42.
1. Remove the following screws and lift up the display assembly right above to
separate it and base assembly.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×3

Display assembly

M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD

Figure 4-38 Removing the display assembly

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-59

4 Replacement Procedures

4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter

2. Remove the mask seals (2 points), mask rubbers (2 points) and following screws
securing the LCD mask.
•

M2.5×6B

FLAT HEAD screw

×4

3. Remove the LCD mask (stuck with a double-sided tape) while releasing the latches.
Mask rubber
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
Mask seal
Mask seal

Mask rubber

M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD

LCD mask

Figure 4-39 Removing the LCD mask
CAUTION: When releasing the latches, be sure to keep the following steps (order)
referring to the figure on next page.
1. Release the latches from the center toward the outside. ((1))
2. Release the latches from the top toward the bottom. ((2), (3) or (3), (2))
3. Release the latches on the bottom from the left toward the right. ((4))

4-60

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter

4 Replacement Procedures

CAUTION: (continued)
(1)

(2)

(3)

The LCD mask is fixed to the
bezel (metal frame) of LCD with
double-sided tape on the back.

(4)
As shown in the figure, the bottom side of the LCD mask is fixed to the LCD
bezel with double-sided tape. If the LCD mask is pulled toward you in
removing it, the bezel may be deformed. When removing the bottom side, be
sure to remove it carefully while removing the double-side tape slowly.
When the bezel of LCD deformed, replace the LCD unit with new one.
When the LCD mask deformed, replace the display mask with new one.
4. Pull out the insulator under the LCD.
5. Remove the FL inverter while peeling off the double-sided tape.
6. Disconnect the cables from the FL inverter.
FL inverter

Insulator

Cable

Figure 4-40 Removing the FL inverter

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-61

4 Replacement Procedures

4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter

6. Carefully lift up the top of the LCD unit.
NOTE: When lifting up the top of the LCD unit, hold the corners of the LCD unit. The
top edge of LCD unit is sensitive area.
7. Remove two glass tapes securing the LCD cable.
8. Disconnect the LCD cable from the connector on the LCD unit and remove the LCD
unit.
CAUTION: When removing the LCD cable, be careful not to damage the connector.

LCD unit

LCD cable

Glass tape

Figure 4-41 Removing the LCD unit

4-62

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter

4 Replacement Procedures

9. Remove the following screws and two LCD supports from the LCD.
•

M2×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×4

M2×3S S-THIN HEAD
LCD
M2×3S S-THIN HEAD

M2×3S S-THIN HEAD

LCD support

M2×3S S-THIN HEAD

Figure 4-42 Removing the LCD support
NOTE: 1) Be careful not to apply pressure to the ICs along the edge of LCD unit. The
ICs are easily damaged.
2) For environmental reasons, do not throw away a malfunctioning LCD unit (or
FL). Please follow local ordinances or regulations for its disposal.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-63

4 Replacement Procedures

4.23 LCD unit/FL inverter

Installing the LCD unit / FL inverter
To install the LCD unit / FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-38 to 4-42.
1. Set two LCD supports to the LCD and secure them with the following screws.
•

M2×3S

S-THIN HEAD screw

×4

CAUTION: When installing the LCD support, do not mistake the left for the right and
vice versa. “L” for the left, “R” for the right and “UP” for the up of the
bracket are marked on the bracket.
2. Stand the LCD unit on the display cover and connect the LCD cable to the connector
on the back of the LCD unit. Stick two glass tapes on the connector of the LCD.
3. Install the LCD unit to the display cover.
4. Connect two cables to the FL inverter.
5. Install the FL inverter in place while sticking the double-sided tape.
6. Insert the insulator under the LCD unit.
7. Install the LCD mask (with double-sided tape) while hooking the latches.
8. Secure the LCD mask with the following screws.
•

M2.5×6B

FLAT HEAD screw

×4

9. Stick the mask seals (2 points) and mask rubbers (2 points).
10. Install the display assembly to the base assembly and secure it with the following
screws.
•

4-64

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

[CONFIDENTIAL]

×3

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.24 Speaker/LCD cable

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Speaker/LCD cable
Removing the Speaker/LCD cable
To remove the speaker/LCD cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-43 and 4-44.
1. Turn up two insulators and peel off two glass tapes.
2. Take out the speakers from the slot.

Glass tape

Insulator
Speaker (right)

Insulator
Speaker (left)

Figure 4-43 Removing the speaker

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-65

4 Replacement Procedures

4.24 Speaker/LCD cable

3. Remove the LCD cable holder while releasing hooks.
4. Take out the LCD cable from the slot.

LCD cable holder

LCD cable

Figure 4-44 Removing the LCD cable
Installing the Speaker/LCD cable
To install the speaker/LCD cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-43 and 4-44.
1. Seat the LCD cable to the slot and install the LCD cable holder.
2. Install the speakers into the slots.
3. Arrange the speaker cables in place and secure it with two insulators and two glass
tapes.

4-66

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.25 Cover latch

4 Replacement Procedures

4.25 Cover latch
Removing the Cover latch
To remove the cover latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-45.
1. Remove the cover cap while pushing three latches from the LCD cover latch side.
2. Remove the LCD cover latch. Be careful not lose the spring.

Cover cap

Spring

Cover latch
Latch

Figure 4-45 Removing the cover latch
Installing the Cover latch
To install the cover latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-45.
1. Install the cover latch in place. Be careful not lose the spring.
2. Set the cover cap and push it until the latches are engaged.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-67

4 Replacement Procedures

4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna

4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Removing the Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
To remove the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-46.
1. Peel off five glass tapes securing the wireless LAN antenna cables and Bluetooth
antenna cable.
2. Remove the wireless LAN antennas and Bluetooth antenna from the slot of the
display assembly.
Glass tape
Wireless LAN antenna

Glass tape

Bluetooth antenna

Glass tape

Figure 4-46 Removing the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna

4-68

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
To install the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-46.
1. Install the wireless LAN antennas and Bluetooth antenna on the display assembly
in place.
2. Stick five glass tapes to secure the wireless LAN antenna cables and Bluetooth
antenna cable.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-69

4 Replacement Procedures

4.27 Hinge

4.27 Hinge
Removing the Hinge
To remove the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-47.
1. Remove the following screws, washers and hinges on the both sides.
•

M2.5×5B

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5

Washer

×2

2. Remove the following screws and hinge caps on the both sides.
•

M2.5×4B

×2

FLAT HEAD screw

Washer
M2.5×5B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Hinge (right)

M2.5×5B FLAT HEAD
Hinge (left)
Washer

Hinge cap (right)

Hinge cap (left)

M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD

Figure 4-47 Removing the hinge

4-70

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.27 Hinge

4 Replacement Procedures

Installing the Hinge
To install the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-47.
1. Install the hinge caps (left and right) and secure them with the following screws.
•

M2.5×4B

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

2. Install the hinge (left and right) and secure them with the washers and following
screws.
•

M2.5×5B

FLAT HEAD screw

×2

•

M2.5

Washer

×2

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-71

4 Replacement Procedures

4.28 Battery slider

4.28 Battery slider
Removing the Battery slider
To remove the battery slider, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-48.
1. Release the latches of the battery sliders (left and right) and remove the slider caps
from the bottom of the computer.
2. Take out the battery sliders from the base assembly.

Battery slider
Latch

Latch

Figure 4-48 Removing the battery slider
Installing the Battery slider
To install the Battery slider, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-48.
1. Install the springs to the battery sliders and set them to the base assembly.
2. Install the slider caps to the base assembly from the bottom of the computer.

4-72

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp
This system uses LCD modules from the following suppliers. The procedure for replacing
the fluorescent lamp is different for each LCD module. Refer to the appropriate procedure.
Type

Part No.

Supplier

Section

G33C0003C110

TMD

4.29.1

G33C0003K110

SAMSUNG

4.29.2

12.1-inch (SXGA+)

NOTE: - When working with a LCD module, always use a flat, grounded table.
- Handle the backlight unit in the environment without dust, such as on the clean
bench. Keep the worktable free from any screws or other material that may
scratch the LCD surface.
- Use an anti-static or protective sheet.
- When replacing the FL unit, cover with a finger protector or similar to prevent
soiling or scratching the LCD panel.
- Be careful when handling the lamp. Excessive force may break the lamp.
- Be careful not to soil or deform the lamp reflector.
- Make sure that the power of the LCD module is turned off before connecting or
disconnecting cables and connectors.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-73

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4.29.1 Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp
CAUTION: When replacing the fluorescent lamp, wear finger covers or gloves to avoid
contaminating or damaging the LCD panel. Be careful not to let dust or
other foreign substance into the module.
Disassembling the 12.1-inch WXGA TMD Fluorescent Lamp
To disassemble the 12.1-inch XGA TMD fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer
to Figure 4-49 to 4-58.
Peeling off the tapes and insulation sheets
1. Place it on a flat surface that is free of foreign objects.
Make sure no dirt on the face to protect the surface of the LCD module from damage.
Put a protection sheet (e.g. soft cloth) on the face.

4-74

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

2. Remove insulation sheet (with the tape on the insulation side attached).
CAUTION: 1. Be careful not to damage the TAB, PCB, B/L reflection sheet.
2. Do not remove the insulation sheet to reuse it.
3. Do not damage the TAB and PCB when removing the double –sided tape
of the insulation sheet.

Tape on the side of bezel

Insulation sheet
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of bezel
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of
bezel

Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of
bezel

Serial Label
CAUTION Label

Disposal Label

Figure 4-49 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (1)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-75

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

Removing the screws
1. Remove the Insulation sheet from the side of Bezel.
2. Remove four screws on the right side and left side.
CAUTION: Be sure to use a Philips screwdriver with a point size 0 bit.

Insulation sheet

Serial Label
CAUTION Label

Disposal Label

Figure 4-50 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (2)

4-76

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

Removing the bezel
1. Without removing the insulation tape, turn the face of module up.
2. Release the four latches of the bezel and frame (two positions on each side).
3. Release the three latches on the top to remove the bezel from the cell (The bezel is
reused.). As the bezel and cell at the lower side are fixed with a double-sided tape,
remove the bezel solely.
CAUTION: 1.When releasing the latches, do not damage the TAB and PCB.

Release three latches
Double-sided tape in side of
the lower bezel.

Release four latches

Figure 4-51 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (3)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-77

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

Opening the PCB
1. Spread out the PCB horizontally.
CAUTION: 1. Be careful not to damage the FPC.
2. Spread the PCB after releasing the PCB latch on plastic frame.

PCB latch
Serial Label
CAUTION Label

Disposal Label

Figure 4-52 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (4)

4-78

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

Removing the cell with PCB
1. Remove the cell with PCB from the backlight unit as shown bellow.
CAUTION: 1. As the back light cell are fixed with a double-sided tape, remove the cell
with PCB slowly not to break the cell.
2. Be careful not to damage the TAB.
Cell with PCB

Double-sided tape

Figure 4-53 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (5)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-79

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

Assembling Fluorescent lamp
Check of the backlight for replacement
1. Check the following items.
Double-sided tape fixing the
ll
The sheet shall not come out of the
frame.

The sheet shall not come
out of the frame.

The sheet shall not come out of the
frame.

The B/L cable shall no come out of the plastic frame.

Figure 4-54 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (6)

4-80

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

Assembling the cell with PCB
1. Turn the backlight on.
2. Check that the backlight is free of dust, foreign objects, or damage. Perform this
check also for the reverse side of the cell. Peel of the separation sheet of double-sided
tape fixing the cell of the back light. Then install the cell with PCB in the backlight
unit.
CAUTION:

1. Set the cell with PCB as far as it goes to the left upper of the backlight
unit.
2. be careful not to damage the TAB.
Cell

Double-sided tape fixing the cell

Figure 4-55 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (7)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-81

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

Folding the TAB/PCB
1. Fold down the TAB (PCB) toward the reverse side of the backlight unit.
CAUTION: 1. Be careful not to damage the TAB.
2. Latch PCB on the PCB latch of the plastic frame.

PCB latch

Serial Label
CAUTION Label

Disposal Label

Figure 4-56 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (8)

4-82

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

Setting the bezel
1. Put the bezel on the top of the frame and latch at four points. ((1) in the bellow
figure)
2. Put the bezel on the bottom of the frame and latch at three points. ((2) in the bellow
figure)
3. Hold the bottom side lightly and stick a double-side tape.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the cell, TAB and B/L.

Latch at three point.

The reflector shall not
come out of the bezel.

Double-sided tape inside of
the bottom of the bezel

Latch at four
points

The reflector shall not
come out of the bezel.

Figure 4-57 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (9)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-83

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

Fixing the PCB and bezel
1. Fixing the PCB and bezel with four screws at the right side and left side (four points)
as shown in the following figure.
CAUTION: 1. The tightening torque must be 0.167 N m (1.7kgf･cm) for all the screws.
There shall not be screw floating.
2. Use an insert bit of point size 0 for the Philips screwdrivers.

Attaching tapes and insulation sheet
1. Attach the double-sided tape of insulation sheet as shown in the following figure.
CAUTION: When attaching tape and insulation sheet, be careful not to damage the
PCB, cell and B/L.
Tape on the side of bezel

Insulation sheet
Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of bezel
Insulation sheet
with double-sided
tape of bezel

Insulation sheet with
double-sided tape of bezel

Serial Label
CAUTION Label

Disposal Label

Figure 4-58 Replacing TMD fluorescent lamp (10)

4-84

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29.2 Replacing the 12.1-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp
To replace the 12.1-inch WXGA Samsung fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer
to figures 4-59 to 4-62.
Removing the fluorescent lamp
1. Remove the PCB cover.

PCB cover

Figure 4-59 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (1)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-85

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

2. Remove the lamp-wire tape and Al tape.

White tape (left)

White tape (bottom)

Al tape (bottom)

Figure 4-60 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (2)
3. Remove the top chassis from the molded frame.
CAUTION: Remove in the order of bottom hook and side hook..

Figure 4-61 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (3)

4-86

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

4 Replacement Procedure

4. Separate the panel assembly and the backlight unit.
CAUTION: Handle with care not to damage the COF and G/D ICs.

Panel assembly

Figure 4-62 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (4)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

4-87

4 Replacement Procedure

4.29 Fluorescent Lamp

Assembling the fluorescent lamp
The assembly procedure of the 12.1-inch Samsung fluorescent lamp is the reverse of the
above disassembly procedure. Refer to figures 4-59 to 4-62.
1. Install the panel assembly on the backlight unit.
2. Install the top chassis on the molded frame.
3. Stick the white tape and Al tape.
4. Stick the PCB cover.

4-88

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendices

[CONFIDENTIAL]

Appendices

App-ii

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendices

Appendix

Contents

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ...........................................................................A-1
Appendix B Board Layout .................................................................................................B-1
B.1

System Board (FBMOS*) Front View...................................................................B-1

B.2

System Board (FBMOS*) Back View ...................................................................B-3

B.3

Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) Front and Back View.................................B-5

Appendix C Pin Assignments ............................................................................................C-1
System board
C.1

CN1400 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin)..........................................................C-1

C.2

CN1410 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin)..........................................................C-4

C.3

CN1850 Main HDD interface connector (11-pin) ................................................C-7

C.4

CN1810 ODD interface connector (50-pin) .........................................................C-8

C.5

CN2110 PC card interface connector (70-pin) .....................................................C-9

C.6

IS2101 MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin) .....................................C-10

C.7

CN2600 Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin) ................................. C-11

C.8

CN3010 MDC interface connector (12-pin) .......................................................C-12

C.9

CN3200 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin) ................................................C-12

C.10

CN3240 PAD interface connector (8-pin) ..........................................................C-13

C.11

CN3260 SW membrane interface connector (13-pin) ........................................C-13

C.12

CN4100 LAN interface connector (12-pin)........................................................C-13

C.13

CN3490 LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin) ......................................C-14

C.14

CN4200 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin) ................................................C-14

C.15

CN4400 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin) ................................................C-14

C.16

CN4614 USB 6/4 connector (8-pin) ...................................................................C-15

C.17

CN4614 USB 0 connector (4-pin) ......................................................................C-15

C.18

CN5000 LCD interface connector (40-pin) ........................................................C-16

C.19

CN5080 RGB connector (15-pin).......................................................................C-17

C.20

CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-pin) ................................................C-17

C.21

J6051 External microphone connector (5-pin) ...................................................C-17

C.22

CN6170 Speaker connector (4-pin) ....................................................................C-17

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

App-iii

Appendices

C.23

J6310 Headphone connector (5-pin)...................................................................C-18

C.24

CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin) ......................................................................C-18

C.25

CN8810 Main Battery connector (10-pin)..........................................................C-18

C.26

CN9300 RTC Battery connector (3-pin).............................................................C-18

C.27

CN8771 FAN interface connector (4-pin) ..........................................................C-19

C.28

CN9520 Fingerprint Sensor board interface connector (6-pin) ..........................C-19

Fingerprint Sensor Board
C.29

CN9550 System board interface connector (6-pin) ............................................C-25

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes ................................................................D-1
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1
E.1

United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard .......................................................................... E-1

E.2

United States (US) Keyboard................................................................................. E-1

Appendix F Wiring Diagrams ........................................................................................... F-1
F.1

LAN Loopback Connector..................................................................................... F-1

F.2

RGB Monitor Loopback Connector....................................................................... F-1

Appendix G BIOS rewrite Procedures ............................................................................ G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite Procedures....................................................................... H-1
Appendix I Reliability ......................................................................................................... I-1

App-iv

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendices

Figures
Figure B-1

System Board (FBMOS*) layout (front) .......................................................B-1

Figure B-2

System Board (FBMOS*) layout (back) .......................................................B-3

Figure B-3

Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) layout (front/back) ............................B-5

Figure E-1

UK keyboard.................................................................................................. E-1

Figure E-2

US keyboard................................................................................................... E-1

Figure F-1

LAN Loopback Connector............................................................................. F-1

Figure F-2

RGB Monitor Loopback Connector .............................................................. F-1

Tables
Table B-1

System board (FBMOS*) ICs and connectors (front)......................................B-2

Table B-2

System board (FBMOS*) connectors (back) ..................................................B-4

Table B-3

Fingerprint Sensor board (FBMOF*) connector (back)...................................B-5

System board
Table C-1

SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin) .................................................................C-1

Table C-2

SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin).................................................................C-4

Table C-3

Main HDD interface connector (11-pin) .......................................................C-7

Table C-4

ODD interface connector (50-pin).................................................................C-8

Table C-5

PC card interface connector (70-pin) ............................................................C-9

Table C-6

MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin) ..........................................C-10

Table C-7

Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin) ........................................ C-11

Table C-8

MDC interface connector (12-pin) ..............................................................C-12

Table C-9

Keyboard interface connector (34-pin) .......................................................C-12

Table C-10

PAD interface connector (8-pin)..................................................................C-13

Table C-11

SW membrane interface connector (13-pin) ...............................................C-13

Table C-12

LAN interface connector (12-pin) ...............................................................C-13

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

App-v

Appendices

Table C-13

LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin)..............................................C-14

Table C-14

IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)........................................................C-14

Table C-15

Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin) .......................................................C-14

Table C-16

USB 6/4 connector (8-pin) ..........................................................................C-15

Table C-17

USB 0 connector (4-pin) .............................................................................C-15

Table C-18

LCD interface connector (40-pin) ...............................................................C-16

Table C-19

RGB connector (15-pin) ..............................................................................C-17

Table C-20

Internal microphone connector (2-pin)........................................................C-17

Table C-21

External microphone connector (5-pin).......................................................C-17

Table C-22

Speaker connector (4-pin) ...........................................................................C-17

Table C-23

Headphone connector (5-pin) ......................................................................C-18

Table C-24

DC-IN connector (4-pin) .............................................................................C-18

Table C-25

Main Battery connector (10-pin) .................................................................C-18

Table C-26

RTC Battery connector (3-pin)....................................................................C-18

Table C-27

FAN interface connector (4-pin)..................................................................C-19

Table C-28

Fingerprint Sensor board interface connector (6-pin) .................................C-19

Finger print Sensor Board
Table C-29

System board interface connector (6-pin) ...................................................C-25

Table D-1

Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) .............................................................................D-1

Table D-2

Scan codes with left Shift key ..........................................................................D-5

Table D-3

Scan codes in Numlock mode ..........................................................................D-6

Table D-4

Scan codes with Fn key....................................................................................D-6

Table D-5

Scan codes in overlay mode .............................................................................D-7

Table D-6

No.124 key scan code.......................................................................................D-7

Table D-7

No.126 key scan code.......................................................................................D-8

Table I-1

MTBF ................................................................................................................ I-1

App-vi

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendix A

Appendices

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Precautions for handling the LCD module
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the
following precautions when handling the LCD module:

1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is
properly aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.

2. For the LCD module, be careful to align the four holes at the right side and left side
of the LCD module with the corresponding holes in the LCD cover before securing
the module with four screws.
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.
Also, the panel’s surface is easily scarred, so be carefully when handling it.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

A-1

Appendices

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty,
try breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a LCD cleaning agent. Apply the agent to
a cloth and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.

LCD

4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change
the screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.

A-2

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

Appendices

5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object,
which could cause breakage or cracks.

6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from
electrostatic discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the
module.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

A-3

Appendices

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long periods.

8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the
liquid crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.

A-4

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

Appendices

9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.

10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin
(amine) or silicon glue (alcohol or oxime). These materials can release gas that can
damage the panel’s polarization.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

A-5

Appendices

A-6

Appendix A Handling the LCD Module

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix B Board Layout

Appendices

Appendix B Board Layout
B.1

System Board (FBMOS*) Front View

Figure B-1 System board (FBMOS*) layout (front)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

B-1

Appendices

Appendix B Board Layout

Table B-1 System board (FBMOS*) ICs and connectors (front)

B-2

Number

Name

CN4100

LAN jack

CN3230

Keyboard connector

CN8781

Fan connector

CN2600

Wireless LAN card connector

IC2000

GMCH

CN3240

Touch pad connector

IC1600

ICH7-M

CN3010

MDC interface connector

CN9300

RTC battery connector

CN6050

Internal microphone connector

J6051

External microphone connector

J6310

Headphone connector

IS2101

Bridge media connector

CN4400

Bluetooth module connector

CN6170

Internal speaker connector

CN1400

Memory module A connector

CN1410

Memory module B connector

CN3260

SW membrane connector

CN5000

LCD connector

CN9520

Fingerprint sensor board connector

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix B Board Layout

B.2

Appendices

System Board (FBMOS*) Back View

Figure B-2 System board (FBMOS*) layout (back)

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

B-3

Appendices

Appendix B Board Layout

Table B-2 System board (FBMOS*) connectors (back)

B-4

Number

Name

CN5080

RGB connector

CN4614

USB 6/4 port

CN4200

IEEEE1394 port

CN1810

ODD connector

CN1850

HDD connector

CN4612

USB 0 port

CN8810

Main battery connector

IS1050

CPU socket

IS1200

GMCH

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix B Board Layout

B.3

Appendices

Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) Front and Back View

(front)

(back)

Figure B-3 Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) layout (front/back)
Table B-3 Fingerprint Sensor Board (FBMOF*) connector (back)
Number

Name

CN9550

System board I/F connector

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

B-5

Appendices

B-6

Appendix B Board Layout

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

Appendix C

Appendix C Pin Assignments
System board
C.1

CN1400 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin)
Table C-1 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

MRVREF-B0V

GND

ADQ04-B1P

I/O

ADQ07-B1P

I/O

ADQ06-B1P

I/O

ADQ00-B1P

I/O

GND

ADM0-B1P

ADQS0-B1N

I/O

GND

ADQS0-B1P

I/O

ADQ05-B1P

I/O

GND

ADQ01-B1P

I/O

ADQ03-B1P

I/O

GND

ADQ02-B1P

I/O

ADQ12-B1P

I/O

GND

ADQ13-B1P

I/O

ADQ14-B1P

I/O

GND

ADQ08-B1P

I/O

ADM1-B1P

GND

ADQS1-B1N

I/O

MCK0-B1P

ADQS1-B1P

I/O

MCK0-B1N

I/O
-

I/O

GRD

GND

ADQ15-B1P

I/O

ADQ10-B1P

I/O

ADQ09-B1P

I/O

ADQ11-B1P

I/O

GND

ADQ21-B1P

I/O

ADQ17-B1P

I/O

ADQ20-B1P

ADQ16-B1P

I/O

GND

ADQS2-B1N

I/O

ADQS2-B1P

I/O

ADM2-B1P

GND

ADQ23-B1P

I/O

ADQ18-B1P

I/O

ADQ19-B1P

I/O

ADQ22-B1P

I/O

GND

ADQ25-B1P

I/O

ADQ29-B1P

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

I/O
-

I/O

C-1

Appendices

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Table C-1 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.

C-2

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

ADQ24-B1P

GND

I/O

ADQS3-B1N

I/O
I/O

ADQ28-B1P

I/O

GND

ADM3-B1P

ADQS3-B1P

GND

ADQ30-B1P

I/O

ADQ27-B1P

I/O

ADQ26-B1P

I/O

ADQ31-B1P

I/O

GND

MCKE0-B1P

MCKE1-B1P

1R8-B1V

ABS2-B1P

1R8-B1V

AMA12-B1P

AMA11-B1P

AMA09-B1P

AMA07-B1P

AMA08-B1P

AMA06-B1P

1R8-B1V

AMA05-B1P

AMA04-B1P

AMA03-B1P

100

AMA02-B1P

101

AMA01-B1P

102

AMA00-B1P

103

1R8-B1V

104

1R8-B1V

105

AMA10-B1P

106

ABS1-B1P

107

ABS0-B1P

108

ARAS-B1N

109

AWE-B1N

110

MCS0-B1N

111

1R8-B1V

112

1R8-B1V

113

ACAS-B1N

114

MODT0-B1P

115

MCS1-B1N

116

AMA13-B1P

I/O

117

1R8-B1V

118

1R8-B1V

119

MODT1-B1P

120

121

GND

122

GND

123

ADQ34-B1P

I/O

124

ADQ36-B1P

I/O

125

ADQ33-B1P

I/O

126

ADQ37-B1P

I/O

127

GND

128

GND

129

ADQS4-B1N

I/O

130

ADM4-B1P

131

ADQS4-B1P

I/O

132

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

Table C-1 SO-DIMM A connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

134

ADQ35-B1P

I/O
I/O

133

GND

135

ADQ39-B1P

I/O

136

ADQ32-B1P

137

ADQ38-B1P

I/O

138

GND

139

GND

140

ADQ44-B1P

I/O

141

ADQ40-B1P

I/O

142

ADQ41-B1P

I/O

143

ADQ45-B1P

I/O

144

GND

145

GND

146

ADQS5-B1N

I/O

147

ADM5-B1P

148

ADQS5-B1P

I/O

149

GND

150

GND

151

ADQ42-B1P

I/O

152

ADQ46-B1P

I/O

153

ADQ43-B1P

I/O

154

ADQ47-B1P

I/O

155

GND

156

GND

157

ADQ48-B1P

I/O

158

ADQ52-B1P

I/O

159

ADQ49-B1P

I/O

160

ADQ53-B1P

I/O

161

GND

162

GND

163

164

MCK1-B1P

165

GND

166

MCK1-B1N

167

ADQS6-B1N

I/O

168

GND

169

ADQS6-B1P

I/O

170

ADM6-B1P

171

GND

172

GND

173

ADQ55-B1P

I/O

174

ADQ54-B1P

I/O

175

ADQ51-B1P

I/O

176

ADQ50-B1P

I/O

177

GND

178

GND

179

ADQ56-B1P

I/O

180

ADQ60-B1P

I/O

181

ADQ57-B1P

I/O

182

ADQ61-B1P

I/O

183

GND

184

GND

185

ADM7-B1P

186

ADQS7-B1N

I/O

187

GND

188

ADQS7-B1P

I/O

189

ADQ58-B1P

I/O

190

GND

191

ADQ62-B1P

I/O

192

ADQ59-B1P

I/O

193

GND

194

ADQ63-B1P

I/O

195

SMBDA0-P3P

I/O

196

GND

197

SMBCK0-P3P

I/O

198

GND

199

P3V

200

GND

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

C-3

Appendices

C.2

Appendix C Pin Assignments

CN1410 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin)
Table C-2 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.

C-4

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

MRBREF-B0V

GND

BDQ01-B1P

I/O

BDQ02-B1P

I/O

BDQ04-B1P

I/O

BDQ06-B1P

I/O

GND

BDM0-B1P

BDQS0-B1N

I/O

GND

BDQS0-B1P

I/O

BDQ05-B1P

I/O

GND

BDQ00-B1P

I/O

BDQ03-B1P

I/O

GND

BDQ07-B1P

I/O

BDQ12-B1P

I/O

GND

BDQ13-B1P

I/O

BDQ08-B1P

I/O

GND

BDQ09-B1P

I/O

BDM1-B1P

GND

BDQS1-B1N

I/O

MCK3-B1P

BDQS1-B1P

I/O

MCK3-B1N

GND

BDQ10-B1P

I/O

BDQ14-B1P

I/O

BDQ11-B1P

I/O

BDQ15-B1P

I/O

GND

BDQ16-B1P

I/O

BDQ17-B1P

I/O

BDQ21-B1P

BDQ20-B1P

I/O

GND

BDQS2-B1N

I/O

BDQS2-B1P

I/O

BDM2-B1P

GND

BDQ23-B1P

I/O

BDQ18-B1P

I/O

BDQ22-B1P

I/O

BDQ19-B1P

I/O

GND

BDQ29-B1P

I/O

BDQ25-B1P

[CONFIDENTIAL]

I/O
-

I/O

I/O
-

I/O

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

Table C-2 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

BDQ24-B1P

GND

I/O

BDQS3-B1N

I/O
I/O

BDQ28-B1P

I/O

GND

BDM3-B1P

BDQS3-B1P

GND

BDQ26-B1P

I/O

BDQ30-B1P

I/O

BDQ27-B1P

I/O

BDQ31-B1P

I/O

GND

MCKE2-B1P

MCKE3-B1P

1R8-B1V

BBS2-B1P

1R8-B1V

BMA12-B1P

BMA11-B1P

BMA09-B1P

BMA07-B1P

BMA08-B1P

BMA06-B1P

1R8-B1V

BMA05-B1P

BMA04-B1P

BMA03-B1P

100

BMA02-B1P

101

BMA01-B1P

102

BMA00-B1P

103

1R8-B1V

104

1R8-B1V

105

BMA10-B1P

106

BBS1-B1P

107

BBS0-B1P

108

BRAS-B1N

109

BWE-B1N

110

MCS2-B1N

111

1R8-B1V

112

1R8-B1V

113

BCAS-B1N

114

MODT2-B1P

115

MCS3-B1N

116

BMA13-B1P

I/O

117

1R8-B1V

118

1R8-B1V

119

MODT3-B1P

120

121

GND

122

GND

123

BDQ32-B1P

I/O

124

BDQ36-B1P

I/O

125

BDQ33-B1P

I/O

126

BDQ37-B1P

I/O

127

GND

128

GND

129

BDQS4-B1N

I/O

130

BDM4-B1P

131

BDQS4-B1P

I/O

132

GND

133

GND

134

BDQ38-B1P

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

I/O

C-5

Appendices

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Table C-2 SO-DIMM B connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.

C-6

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

135

BDQ34-B1P

I/O

136

BDQ39-B1P

I/O

137

BDQ35-B1P

I/O

138

GND

139

GND

140

BDQ44-B1P

I/O

141

BDQ40-B1P

I/O

142

BDQ45-B1P

I/O

143

BDQ41-B1P

I/O

144

GND

145

GND

146

BDQS5-B1N

I/O

147

BDM5-B1P

148

BDQS5-B1P

I/O

149

GND

150

GND

151

BDQ47-B1P

I/O

152

BDQ46-B1P

I/O

153

BDQ42-B1P

I/O

154

BDQ43-B1P

I/O

155

GND

156

GND

157

BDQ48-B1P

I/O

158

BDQ53-B1P

I/O

159

BDQ52-B1P

I/O

160

BDQ49-B1P

I/O

161

GND

162

GND

163

164

MCK2-B1P

165

GND

166

MCK2-B1N

167

BDQS6-B1N

I/O

168

GND

169

BDQS6-B1P

I/O

170

BDM6

171

GND

172

GND

173

BDQ51-B1P

I/O

174

BDQ50-B1P

I/O

175

BDQ54-B1P

I/O

176

BDQ55-B1P

I/O

177

GND

178

GND

179

BDQ57-B1P

I/O

180

BDQ56-B1P

I/O

181

BDQ61-B1P

I/O

182

BDQ60-B1P

I/O

183

GND

184

GND

185

BDM7-B1P

186

BDQS7-B1N

I/O

187

GND

188

BDQS7-B1P

I/O

189

BDQ58-B1P

I/O

190

GND

191

BDQ59-B1P

I/O

192

BDQ62-B1P

I/O

193

GND

194

BDQ63-B1P

I/O

195

SMBDA0-P3P

I/O

196

GND

197

SMBCK0-P3P

I/O

198

GND

199

P3V

200

P3V

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.3

Appendices

CN1850 Main HDD interface connector (11-pin)
Table C-3 Main HDD interface connector (11-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

ZSATT0-P1P

ZSATT0-P1N

GND

ZSATR0-P1N

ZSATR0-P1P

GND

P3V

GND

P5V

GND

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

C-7

Appendices

C.4

Appendix C Pin Assignments

CN1810 ODD interface connector (50-pin)
Table C-4 ODD interface connector (50-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

GND

PLTRS0-E3N +

PDD08-P3P

I/O

RSTTIDB-P3N

C-8

PDD07-P3P

I/O

PDD09-P3P

I/O

PDD06-P3P

I/O

PDD10-P3P

I/O

PDD05-P3P

I/O

PDD11-P3P

I/O

PDD04-P3P

I/O

PDD12-P3P

I/O

PDD03-P3P

I/O

PDD13-P3P

I/O

PDD02-P3P

I/O

PDD14-P3P

I/O

PDD01-P3P

I/O

PDD15-P3P

I/O

PDD00-P3P

I/O

PDDREQ-P3P

GND

PDIOR-P3N

PDIOW-P3N

GND

PIORDY-P3P

PDDACK

IDEIRQ-P3P

PDA1-P3N

PDA0-P3P

PDA2-P3N

PDCS1-P3N

SB-P5V

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.5

Appendices

CN2110 PC card interface connector (70-pin)
Table C-5 PC card interface connector (70-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

ACAD00-EYP

I/O

GND

ACAD01-PYP

I/O

ACAD03-PYP

I/O

ACAD05-PYP

I/O

ACAD07-PYP

I/O

ACCBEO-PYN

I/O

ACAD09-PYP

I/O

ACAD11-PYP

I/O

ACAD12-PYP

I/O

ACAD14-PYP

I/O

ACCBE1-PYN

I/O

ACPAR-PYP

I/O

ACPERR-PYN

I/O

ACGNT-PYN

I/O

ACINT-PYN

I/O

MCVCCA-PYV

I/O

MCVPPA-PYV

I/O

ACCLK-PYP

I/O

ACIRDY-PYN

I/O

ACCBE2-PYN

I/O

ACAD18-PYP

I/O

ACAD20-PYP

I/O

ACAD21-PYP

I/O

ACAD22-PYP

I/O

ACAD23-PYP

I/O

ACAD24-PYP

I/O

ACAD25-PYP

I/O

ACAD26-PYP

I/O

ACAD27-PYP

I/O

ACAD29-PYP

I/O

ACD02-PYP

I/O

ACCLKR-PYN

I/O

GND

ACCD1-P3N

I/O

ACAD02-PYP

I/O

ACAD04-PYP

I/O

ACAD06-PYP

I/O

ACD14-PYP

I/O

ACAD08-PYP

I/O

ACAD10-PYP

I/O

ACVS1-P3P

I/O

ACD13-PYP

I/O

ACD15-PYP

I/O

ACD16-PYP

I/O

ACA18-PYP

I/O

ACLOCK-PYP

I/O

ACSTOP-PYP

I/O

ACDEVS-PYP

I/O

MCVPPA-PYV

ACTRDY-PYN

I/O

ACFRAM-PYN

I/O

ACD17-PYP

I/O

ACD19-PYP

I/O

ACVS2-P3P

I/O

ACRST-PYN

I/O

ACSERR-PYN

I/O

ACREQ-PYN

I/O

ACCBE3-PYN

I/O

ACAUDI-PYP

ACSTSC-PYP

ACD28-PYP

I/O

ACD30PYP

I/O

ACD31-PYP

I/O

ACCD2-P3N

GND

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

C-9

Appendices

C.6

Appendix C Pin Assignments

IS2101 MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin)
Table C-6 MEDIA BRIDGE interface connector (42-pin)
Pin No.

C-10

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

MSDAT2-P3P

I/O

MSDAT3-P3P

MSBS-P3P

I/O

GND

I/O
I/O
-

GND

FM-P3V

MSCLK-P3P

I/O

MSDAT3-P3P

I/O

MSCD-P3N

MSDAT2-P3P

I/O

MSSDIO-P3P

I/O

MSDAT1-P3P

I/O

MSBS-P3P

I/O

GND

FM-P3V

MSCLK-P3P

I/O

GND

MSSDIO-P3P

I/O

MSSDAT1-P3P

I/O

SM-P3V

SDAT3-P3P

I/O

SDAT2-P3P

I/O

SDAT1-P3P

I/O

SDAT0-P3P

I/O

MSDAT3-P3P

I/O

MSDAT2-P3P

I/O

MSDAT1-P3P

I/O

MSSDIO-P3P

I/O

GND

MSCLK-P3P

I/O

MXDWE-P3N

SDCMD-P3P

I/O

SMCLE-P3P

I/O

MXDCE-P3N

MXDRE-P3N

SMRDY-P3P

MXDCD-P3N

GND

SDCD-P3N

GND

SDWP-P3P

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.7

Appendices

CN2600 Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin)
Table C-7 Wireless LAN card interface connector (52-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

PEWAKE-E3N

P3V

WCHDAT-P3P

GND

WCHCLK-P3P

1R5-P1V

MPEXRQ-P3N

GND

XPEWL-P3N

XPEWL-P3P

GND

(WLRFON-S3N)

GND

PLTRS1-E3N

ZPERWL-P1N

E3V

ZPERWL-P1P

GND

1R5-P1V

GND

SMBCK0-P3P

ZPETWL-P1N

SMBDA0-P3P

ZPETWL-P1P

GND

1R5-P1V

GND

P3V

GND

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

C-11

Appendices

C.8

Appendix C Pin Assignments

CN3010 MDC interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-8 MDC interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.

C.9

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

GND

ACZOT1-P3P

GND

E3V

ACZSY1-P3P

GND

ACZIN1-E3P

I/O

GND

ACZRS1-E3N

XAZBC1-P3P

GND

CN3200 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Table C-9 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Pin No.

C-12

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

NUMLED-P5N

ARWLED-P5N

CAPLED-P5N

P5V

KBSC00-S3N

KBSC01-S3N

KBSC02-S3N

KBSC03-S3N

KBSC04-S3N

KBSC05-S3N

KBSC06-S3N

KBRT00-S3N

KBSC07-S3N

KBSC08-S3N

KBSC09-S3N

KBRT01-S3N

KBRT02-S3N

KBRT03-S3N

KBSC10-S3N

KBSC11-S3N

KBRT04-S3N

KBRT05-S3N

KBSC12-S3N

KBSC13-S3N

KBRT06-S3N

KBRT07-S3N

KBSC14-S3N

KBSC15-S3N

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

C.10 CN3240 PAD interface connector (8-pin)
Table C-10 PAD interface connector (8-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

GND

IPDCLK-P5P

I/O

IPDDAT-P5P

P5V

I/O
I

GND

C.11 CN3260 SW membrane interface connector (13-pin)
Table C-11 SW membrane interface connector (13-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

PNLOFF-S3N

CDNEXT-S3N

CDPREV-S3N

GPBTNB-S3N

CDPLAY-S3N

CDSTOP-S3N

GPBTNA-S3N

PWRSW-S3N

GND

C.12 CN4100 LAN interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-12 LAN interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

ZMDI2P-EYP

I/O

ZMDI2P-EYN

I/O

ZMDI3P-EYP

I/O

ZMDI3P-EYN

I/O

ZMDI0P-EYP

I/O

ZMDI0P-EYN

I/O

ZMDI1P-EYP

I/O

ZMDI1P-EYN

I/O

LLINK-E3N

LACT-E3N

GND

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

C-13

Appendices

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.13 CN3490 LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-13 LPC debug port interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

P3V

DBGDET-P3N

GND

LPCFRM

LAD0-P3P

I/O

LAD1-P3P

I/O

LAD2-P3P

I/O

LAD3-P3P

I/O

PLTRS2-E3N

X33DBG-P3P

P3V

GND

C.14 CN4200 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-14 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.
2

ZTPB0-P3P

I/O

ZTPA0-P3P

I/O

ZTPB0-P3N

I/O

ZTPA0-P3N

Signal Name

I/O

GND

C.15 CN4400 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)
Table C-15 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin)
Pin No.

C-14

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

GND

BTMDL-P3N

BTRST-S3N

GND

(GND)

WCHCLK-P3P

ZUSBBT-P3P

I/O

ZUSBBT-E3N

I/O

BT-P3V

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

C.16 CN4614 USB 6/4 connector (8-pin)
Table C-16 USB 6/4 connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
1T

Signal Name
USBOPS-E5V
ZUSBP6-E3N
USBOPS-E5V
ZUSBP4-E3P
GND

I/O

Pin No.

I/O
I/O
-

2
4
6
8
2T

Signal Name
ZUSBP6-E3N
GND
ZUSBP4-E3N
GND
GND

I/O
I/O
I/O
-

C.17 CN4614 USB 0 connector (4-pin)
Table C-17 USB 0 connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
1
3
1T

Signal Name
USB1PS-E5V
USBP0-E3P
GND

I/O

Pin No.

I/O
-

2
4
2T

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Signal Name
ZUSBP0-E3N
GND
GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

I/O
I/O
-

C-15

Appendices

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.18 CN5000 LCD interface connector (40-pin)
Table C-18 LCD interface connector (40-pin)
Pin No.

C-16

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

BRT2DA-S3P

BRT10-P5P

Pulled up to FLP5V

FL-P5V

GND

P3V

PNL-P3V

13
15

PNL-P3V

ILDSDA-P3P

I/O

14
16

GND

ILDSCL-P3P

I/O

GND

ZTXDA2-PYN

ZTXDTA2-PYN

GND

ZTXDTA1-PYN

GND

ZTXDTA0-PYN

34
36

ZTXDTA0-PYN

GND

XTXCKA-PYN

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

C.19 CN5080 RGB connector (15-pin)
Table C-19 RGB connector (15-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

RED-PXP

GRN-PXP

BLU-PXP

GND

P5V

GND

IDSDA-P3P

I/O

CRTEN-P3N +
IHSYNC-P2P

(IVSYNC-P2P)

IDSCL-P5P

I/O

GND

C.20 CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-pin)
Table C-20 Internal microphone connector (2-pin)
Pin No.
1

Signal Name
MICIN

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name
A-GND

I/O
-

C.21 J6051 External microphone connector (5-pin)
Table C-21 External Microphone connector (5-pin)
Pin No.

C.22

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

A-GND

MICIN

VREF1

(MICIN)

CN6170 Speaker connector (4-pin)
Table C-22 Speaker connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

SPOTR-PXN

SPOTR-PXP

SPOTL-PXP

SPOTL-PXN

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

C-17

Appendices

Appendix C Pin Assignments

C.23 J6310 Headphone connector (5-pin)
Table C-23 Headphone connector (5-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

A-GND

HEADL-PXP

HEADR-PXP

(SPKEN)

C.24 CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Table C-24 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

ADPDC

GND

C.25 CN8810 Main Battery connector (10-pin)
Table C-25 Main Battery connector (10-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

PVBL1

BTMP1

(DCHG)

M5V

PSCL-S5P

I/O

PSDA-S5P

I/O

GND

DBT10V-S5N

GND

C.26 CN9300 RTC Battery connector (3-pin)
Table C-26 RTC Battery connector (3-pin)
Pin No.

C-18

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.
2

ZS-PWCHKF

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

Signal Name

I/O

GND

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Appendices

C.27 CN8771 FAN interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-27 FAN interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.
2
4

P5V

GND

Signal Name

I/O

FANG-P3P

(FPWM-S3P)

C.28 CN9520 Fingerprint sensor board interface connector (6-pin)
Table C-28 OF board interface connector (6-pin)
Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

ZUSBFS-E3P

I/O
I/O

GND

ZUSBFS-E3N

I/O

GND

FGSPON-S3N

E3V

GND

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

C-19

Appendices

Appendix C Pin Assignments

Fingerprint Sensor Board
C.29 CN9550 System board interface connector (6-pin)
Table C-29 System board interface connector (6-pin)
Pin No.

I/O

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

E3V

FGSPON-S3N

GND

ZUSBFS-E3N

I/O

ZUSBFS-E3P

I/O

GND

C-20

Signal Name

GND

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Appendices

Appendix D

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)
Cap
No.

Keytop

Code set 1

Code set 2

Note

Make

Break

Make

‘ ~

1 !

2 @

3 #

4 $

5 %

6 ^

7 &

8 *

9 (

0 )

- _

= +

BkSp

Tab

[ {

] }

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Break

[CONFIDENTIAL]

D-1

Appendices

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)

D-2

Cap
No.

Keytop

Code set 1

Code set 2

Note

Make

Break

Make

\ ¦

Caps Lock

; :

‘ “

Enter

Shift (L)

No.102
key

, <

. >

/ ?

Shift (R)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

Break
*2

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Appendices

Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)
Cap
No.

Keytop

Code set 1

Code set 2

Note

Make

Break

Make

Ctrl

Alt (L)

Space

ALT (R)

Ins

Del

←

Home

End

↑

↓

PgUp

PgDn

→

110

Esc

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

F10

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Break

[CONFIDENTIAL]

D-3

Appendices

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)
Cap
No.

Keytop

Code set 1

122

F11

123

F12

124

PrintSc

Refer to table 2-25

126

Pause

Refer to table 2-25

202

203

Win

204

App

Make

Code set 2

Break

Make

Note

Break

Notes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

D-4

*
*
*
*
*

Scan codes differ by overlay function.
This key corresponds to key No. 42 in the 102 key mode.
Combination with the Fn key makes different codes.
Scan codes differ by mode.
The Fn key does not generate a code by itself..

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Appendices

Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key
Cap

Key

No.

top

E0 AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 4A E0 F0 4A E0 12

INS

E0 AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 12

DEL

E0 AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 12

←

E0 AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 12

Code set 1
Make

Break

Code set 2
Make

Break

Home E0 AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12

End

E0 AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 12

↑

E0 AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 12

↓

E0 AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 12

PgUp E0 AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12

PgDn E0 AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 12

→

E0 AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 12

203

Win

E0 AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 12

204

App

E0 AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 12

Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key.
In the case of Key no. 55 Overlay mode only.
In combination with the right Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:
Set 1
Set 2

With left Shift
With right Shift
E0 AA ___________E0 B6
E0 2A ____________E0 36
E0 F0 12 _________E0 F0 59
E0 12 ____________E0 59

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

D-5

Appendices

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode
Cap

Key

Code set 1

No.

top

INS

E0 2A E0 52 E0 D2 E0 AA E0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12

DEL

E0 2A E0 53 E0 D3 E0 AA E0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12

←

E0 2A E0 4B E0 CB E0 AA E0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12

Home

E0 2A E0 47 E0 C7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12

End

E0 2A E0 4F E0 CF E0 AA E0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12

↑

E0 2A E0 48 E0 C8 E0 AA E0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12

↓

E0 2A E0 50 E0 D0 E0 AA E0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12

PgUp

E0 2A E0 49 E0 C9 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12

PgDn

E0 2A E0 51 E0 D1 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12

→

E0 2A E0 4D E0 CD E0 AA E0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12

203

Win

E0 2A E0 5B E0 DB E0 AA E0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12

204

App

E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA E0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12

Make

Code set 2
Break

Make

Break

Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key

D-6

Cap

Key

Code set 1

No.

top

ENT

CTRL

LALT

121

ARROW

122

NUMERIC

123

Scrl

Make

[CONFIDENTIAL]

Code set 2

Break

Make

Break

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Appendices

Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode
Cap
No.

Code set 1

Keytop

Code set 2

Make

Break

Make

Break

(8)

(9)

(*)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(–)

(1)

(2)

(3)

;

(+)

(0)

(.)

(/)

Table D-6 No.124 key scan code
Key
top

Code set 1

Shift
Make

Code set 2
Break

Prt Sc Common E0 2A E0 37 E0 B7 E0

Make

Break

AA E0 12 E0 7C E0 F0 7C E0 F0

Ctrl +

E0 37

E0 B7

E0 7C

E0 F0 7C

Shift +

E0 37

E0 B7

E0 7C

E0 F0 7C

Alt +

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

F0 B4

[CONFIDENTIAL]

D-7

Appendices

Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes

Table D-7 No.126 key scan code
Key
top

Shift

Code set 1

Code set 2

Make

Pause

Common
*

E1 1D

Ctrl*

E0 46

*: This key generates only make codes.

D-8

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix E Key Layout

Appendices

Appendix E

Appendix E
E.1

Key Layout

United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard

Figure E-1 UK keyboard

E.2

United States (US) Keyboard

Figure E-2 US keyboard

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

E-1

Appendices

E-2

Appendix E Key Layout

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix F Wiring diagrams

Appendices

Appendix F

Appendix F
F.1

Wiring diagrams

LAN Loopback Connector

Figure F-1 LAN Loopback Connector

F.2

RGB Monitor Loopback Connector

Figure F-2 RGB Monitor Loopback Connector

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

F-1

Appendices

F-2

Appendix F Wiring diagrams

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures

Appendices

Appendix G

Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the
system BIOS.
Tools
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:
BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer that has renewed BIOS data.
Rewriting the BIOS
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC card.
4. Connect an USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB
FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the tilde character key until a beep sounds.
For example
(US Keyboard)
(UK Keyboard)
(There is the key at the left side of the 1 key in the UK key board.)
6. The BIOS rewriting starts
7. When the process is completed, it beeps and the system automatically reboots.
NOTE:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer when you rewrite the BIOS.
2.

Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the BIOS. If the rewrite
fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.

If you fail to rewrite BIOS, then when you next turn on the power, a message
may be displayed that the contents of the BIOS have been erased. In this
case, insert the BIOS rewriting disk and the BIOS will be rewritten.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

G-1

Appendices

G-2

Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures

Appendices

Appendix H

Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the EC/KBC system program when you update the
EC/KBC system.
Tools
To rewrite the EC/KBC, you need the following tool:
EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer
Rewriting the EC/KBC
NOTE: 1. Rewrite the EC/KBC only when instructed by a diagnostic disk release
notice.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the EC/KBC.
3. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the EC/KBC.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
4. If you fail to rewrite EC/KBC, then when you next turn on the power, a
message may be displayed that the contents of the EC/KBC have been
erased. In this case, insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk and the
EC/KBC will be rewritten.
5. Normally it takes about 30 seconds to rewrite the EC/KBC. It may take 3
minutes (maximum), depending on the conditions of the computer or ICs.
The computer is not hung up. Allow sufficient time. Never reboot or turn off
the power to the computer before the rewriting is completed.
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC Card.
4. Connect an USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB
FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the Tab key. (Keep holding down the key
until a beep sounds.) The EC/KBC rewriting starts.
6. When the EC/KBC rewrite is completed, the system is automatically turned off.

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

[CONFIDENTIAL]

H-1

Appendices

H-2

Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Appendix I Reliability

Appendices

Appendix I

Reliability

The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures).
Table I-1 MTBF
Time (hours)
MTBF

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

6,056

[CONFIDENTIAL]

I-1

Appendices

I-2

Appendix I Reliability

[CONFIDENTIAL]

PORTÉGÉ M500 Maintenance Manual (960-559)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Tagged PDF                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Modify Date                     : 2008:01:31 10:31:34-05:00
Create Date                     : 2006:04:25 15:52:04+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:01:31 10:31:34-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Word 用 Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Microsoft Word - 559m_fr.doc
Creator                         : 
Document ID                     : uuid:f558f886-4279-40c6-b447-85ff05e00ff8
Instance ID                     : uuid:376ac873-7581-40f5-9c7e-f436fede388a
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 374
Author                          :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toshiba Personal Computer Satellite U200 Maintenance Manual 559m_fr

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation